Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2014 


https://archive.org/details/childrensnieetingOOride_0 


Children's  Meetings 

AND 

HOW  TO  CONDUCT  THEM 

WITH  LESSONS,  OUTLINES,  DIAGRAMS,  MUSIC  AND 
HELPFUL  SUGGESTIONS 

BY 

LUCY  J.  RIDER  AND  NELLIE  M.  CARMAN 

ASiflSTED  BY  MANY  WELL-KNOWN  WRITERS 
INTRODUCTION  BY 

REV.  J.  H.  VINCENT,  D.D. 


CHICAGO  NEW  YORK  TORONTO 

FLEMING     H.     REVELL  COMPANY 
LONDON      &  EDINBURGH 


Copyright. 
1884. 

By  F.  H.  REVBLIv. 


TO 

TWO  MOTHERS, 


IN  GRATEFUL  MEMORY  OF  EARLY  LESSONS, 

AND 

TO  ALL 

WHO  ARE  TRYING  TO  LEAD  THE  CHILDREN 
TO  JESUS,  AND  TRAIN  THEM  FOR 
HIS  SERVICE, 

"VE  DEDICATE  THIS  LITTLE  BOOK;. 


flGI^NOWLEDGMENT. 


Our  grateful  acknowledgments  are  due,  and  our 
thanks  are  most  heartily  tendered,  to  the  kind  friends 
named  below,  without  whose  prompt  and  generous  help 
the  preparation  of  this  book  would  hardly  have  been 
undertaken.  They  have  heard  the  voice  of  the  Shepherd 
saying  "Feed  my  Lambs!"  May  that  Great  Shepherd 
himself  abundantly  reward  them. 


Rev.  J.  H.  Vincent,  D.  D. 

H.  R.  Falmor. 

Rev.  David  R.  Breed. 

Mrs.  G.  R.  Alden,  (♦'Pansy"). 

Knox  P.  Taylor. 

A,  S.  Carman. 
Mrs.  V.  J.  Kent. 
J.  C.  C. 

W.  B.  Jacobs. 
Rev.  J.  G.  Merrill. 

B,  F.  Jacobs. 

Mrs.  S.  M.  I.  Henry. 
Rev.  W.  F.  Crafts. 
Mrs.  W.  F.  Crafts. 
Mary  G.  Burdette. 
Mrs.  C.  M.  Harris. 
W.  H.  Doane. 
Philip  Phillips. 
Miss  Julia  A.  Johnston. 
John  J.  Hood. 

C,  H.  Whiting. 


Mrs.  Emily  Huntington  Miller. 

Carrie  B.  Reynolds. 

Mrs.  J,  F.  Willing. 

Martha  Van  Marter. 

Mary  A.  Liathbury. 

Frances  E.  Willard. 

Mrs.  A.  P.  Graves. 

I>.  P.  Ward. 

Prof.  C.  W.  Jerome. 

Rev.  T.  P.  Marsh. 

Mrs.  Alice  W.  Knox. 

Rev.  E.  B.  Rundell. 

Mrs.  Annie  Downie. 

Mrs.  J.  E.  Foster. 

Rev.  A.  F.  Schauffler. 

Mrs.  Geo.  R.  Partridge. 

Messrs.  Biglow  and  Main. 

Prof.  E.  O.  Excel! . 

Miss  Emma  Wright. 

Miss  Emma  F.  Parsons. 

Rev.  I,  Baltzell. 


Page. 


Introduction,         -          -          Rev.  J.  H.  Vincent,  D.  D.  9 

CHAPTER       I.    God's  Call  to  Work,       -          -          -  13 

CHAPTER     II.    From  Our  Note  Books,         -          -  17 

CHAPTER    III.    Training  Christian  Children,          -  23 

CHAPTER    IV.    Normal  Lessons,        -         -          -  27 

CHAPTER     V.    Heaven,  (An  Outline  Filled  Up.)            -  37 

CHAPTER    VI.    Outlines  on  the  Lord's  Prayer,    -  47 

CHAPTER  VII.    Outlines,    -          -          -          -          -  57 

The  Little  King,  -          -          -      Rev.  David  R.  Breed.  57 

Finding,          -          -          -          -          -          -          -  58 

Envy,       -      Adapted  from  Mrs.  G.  R.  Alden,  ("Pansy").  59 

The  Christian  Farmer,      -          -          -          -     J.  C.  C.  59 

The  Hand  of  Faith,     -          -          -          A.  S.  Carman.  60 

The  Book  of  Life,            -          -          -  Mrs.  V,  J.  Kent.  61 

Finding  Rest,            ......  62 

Conversion,          ......  63 

CHAPTER  VIII.    Sermons  for  Children.           -          -  65 

The  Loving  Invitation,        -          -            W.  B.  Jacobs.  65 

The  Woman  who  was  Bent  Double,      -       W.  B.  Jacobs.  68 

Death,             .          -          .          .      Rev.  J.  G.  Merrill.  70 

God  Thinking  About  us,            -          Rev.  W.  F.  Crafts.  73 

Naaman,         ....            w.  B.Jacobs.  76 

Sin  and  its  Remedy,        -          -       Mrs.  S.  M.  I.  Henry.  78 

The  Weather,            -          -          -     Rev.  J.  G.  Merrill.  80 

CHAPTER  IX.    Outlines.          ....  84 

Salt,     -         -         -  •        '         •      Mary  G.  Burdette.  84 

A  Little  Cake,   84 


vi 


CONTENTS. 


Page. 

The  Vine  and  its  Branches, 

Knox  P.  Taylor. 

85 

The  Candle  Sermon, 

Arr.  by  Rev.  A,  F.  Schauffler. 

.  86 

The  Two  Cups, 

-    After  Mrs.  S.  M.  I.  Henry. 

89 

Bible  Temperance  Lesson, 

Martha  Van  Marter. 

93 

Being  Converted, 

-      Mrs.  J.  F.  Willing. 

96 

Walking  Christians, 

Carrie  B.  Reynolds. 

98 

CHAPTER  X.  Outlines. 

- 

100 

The  Bible  Boy's  Crown, 

B.  F.  Jacobs. 

100 

The  Whole  Armor,  - 

Rev.  W.  F.  Crafts. 

101 

Acrostics, 

Prof.C.  W.Jerome. 

103 

The  Rebellious  City, 

Mrs.  W.  F.  Crafts. 

103 

First  Fruits, 

A.  S.  Carman. 

105 

The  Widow's  Son,  - 

Mrs.  George  R.  Partridge. 

107 

The  S.  S.  Scholar's  Responsibility,         Mrs.  C.  M.  Harris. 

108 

Lessons  from  the  Magnet, 

Knox  P.  Taylor. 

108 

CHAPTER  XL    Outlines  on  the  Beatitudes. 

110 

CHAPTER  Xn.  Outlines. 

117 

A  Robe  of  Righteousness, 

117 

Sowing  and  Reaping, 

118 

Water, 

119 

The  Master  is  Come  and  Calleth  for  Thee, 

120 

The  Promises, 

121 

The  Judgment, 

121 

Loaves  and  Fishes,  - 

-    Rev.  E.  D.  Rundell. 

122 

Charcoal,      -  - 

Rev.  E.  D.  Rundell. 

123 

CHAPTER  XIIL  Outlines. 

124 

The  First  Missionaries,  - 
Bible  Missionary  Lesson, 
Missionaries, 
Idols, 

Consider  the  Lilies, 

Wheat  and  Chaff,  - 

The  Christian  a  Tree,  - 

The  Telephone, 

Prohibition, 

A  Ladder  to  Ruin,  - 


Mrs.  G.  R.  Alden,  ("Pansy").  124 

-  Mrs.  Alice  W.  Knox.  126 
Mrs.  Annie  Downey.  129 

-  130 

Mary  G.  Burdette.  131 

Mary  G.  Burdette.  131 

J.  C.  C.  132 

-  N.  M.  C.  133 

Mrs.  J.  E.  Foster.  134 

-  Prof.  C.  W.  Jerome.  136 


CONTENTS, 


vii 


CHAPTER  XIV.    Outlines.      .  -  .  .  ^^^®* 

Fight  the  Good  Fight,        Mrs.  Emily  Huntington  Miller.  137 

A  Temperance  Lesson,           -           Frances  E.  Willard.  137 

Prayer,        -             ------  143 

A  Treasure  Box,           -          -            Mrs.  A.  P.  Graves.  144 

Which  Way.?            -          -          -      Mary  A.  Lathbury.  147 

Five  Fingers,      •          -          -       Rev.  David  R.  Breed.  150 

Witnessing,             -          -          -          -      D.  P.  Ward.  151 

Room  for  Jesus,            -          -          Carrie  B.  Reynolds.  153 

The  Hand,     -------  154 

Webs,       -          -   R.    Used  by  per.  of  Dr.  J.  H.  Vincent.  156 

Crowns,        -          -          -          -          -            B.  F.  J.  159 

One  Boy's  Experience,  -          -          -  Rev.  T.  P.  Marsh.  160 
Suggestive  Program, 

CHAPTER    XV.    Lessons  in  Brief.     -          -          -  163 
CHAPTER  XVI.          -          -          ...  -172 

Pattern  Pages,     ------  178 

Music,           -          -          -          -          -          -          -  183 

Index  op  (Qusig. 


Page. 


Angry  Words,  -  -  194 
Dear  Savior,  Ever  at  my  Side  204 

Follow  Me,    -       -       -  202 

Happy  Land,      -       -       -  183 

Happy  Little  Children,  -  197 

I  do  Believe,      -       -       -  187 

If  I  Come  to  Jesus,       -  198 

I'm  but  a  Youthful  Pilgrim,  193 

I  Want  to  be  With  Jesus,  19o 

I  was  lost,  a  Little  Lamb,  -  195 

I  will  Sing  for  Jesus,    -  184 

I  Will  Tell  Jesus,      -       -  186 

Jesus  Bids  us  Shine,      •  206 


Page 

Jesus  Knows,    -       -  -  185 

Jesus  Loves  Me,    -       -  191 

Little  Ones  Like  Me,  -  203 

Little  Travellers  Zionward,  200 

Never  be  Afraid,       -  -  196 

Prayer  for  Closing,       -  207 

Sailing  o'er  the  Sea,  -  192 

Singing  as  we  Journey,  -  201 

Sweet  Story,      -       -  -  188 

The  Lord  Bless  Thee,    -  206 

The  Royal  Proclamation,  -  205 

These  Two  Little  Eyes,  -  199 

Thou  art  My  Shepherd,  -  189 


INIPI^ODUGJIIION, 

BY  J.  H.  VINCENT,  D.  D. 

The  children  of  to-day  are  the  society,  the  church  and 
the  nation  of  to-morrow.  The  prattler  at  your  side  whose 
sweet  mispronunciations  charm  you,  will  soon  with  keen 
discrimination  and  ample  vocabulary,  give  tone  and  ten- 
dency to  the  parlor.  The  boy  with  his  whip  and  the  girl 
with  her  doll  will  before  long  rule  real  factors  in  church 
and  State,  and  train  real  lives  for  the  weal  or  woe  of  the 
nation.  See  the  coming  mother  in  that  little  old-fashioned 
darling,  rocking  her  baby  to  sleep,  and  humming  the  lulla- 
by tunes  which  so  recently  sounded  in  her  own  ears!  See 
the  voter,  the  orator,  the  merchant,  the  banker,  the  editor, 
the  senator,  in  the  stout  youngster  with  bootlegs  outside  his 
trousers,  and  uncombed  head  crowned  with  torn  and  twist- 
ed cap.  Music  and  oratory,  enterprise  and  money,  railroad 
schemes  and  political  devices,  power — social,  religious,  com- 
mercial and  educational,  lie  all  unfashioned  and  undirected 
in  the  little  brains  and  muscles  and  hearts  of  the  children 
around  you. 

How  shall  all  this  power  be  directed  ?  There  is  a  prob- 
lem. Take  time  to  ponder  it,  arid  be  not  too  sure  at  any 
time  that  you  have  found  a  solution.  Moral  beings,  under 
the  mysterious  law  of  freedom  and  responsibility,  are  not 
like  "plastic  clay,"  as  the  poets  sing.  There  is  no  fixed 
law  of  intellectual  and  spiritual  dynamics  which  may  be 
counted  upon  as  you  make  your  estimates  of  cause  and 

ix 


X 


INTRODUCTION, 


effect,  and  of  force  and  motion.  The  children  are  not 
"sheets  of  white  paper,"  to  be  written  on  and  filled  out  as 
one  may  choose.  They  are  not  receptive  canvas  ready  for 
line  and  color  according  to  the  artist's  will.  There  is  a 
half-truth  in  all  this  usual  rhetoric,  about  the  susceptibility 
and  pliability  of  childhood.  And  half-truths  are  dangerous 
things.  In  fact  children  continually  disappoint  us.  Out  of 
hot-beds  of  taste  and  culture  and  religion  spring  many 
strange  plants;  and  lilies  fair  and  fragrant,  are  found  with 
their  roots  in  foulest  places  from  which  we  had  expected 
no  good  thing. 

These  things  are  not  said  to  deny  the  general  law  of 
like  from  like,  nor  to  discourage  the  endeavors  of  devout 
and  prudent  souls  who  work  diligently  in  the  beginning 
that  the  end  may  be  approved;  but  to  remind  mothers  and 
fathers  and  teachers  that  there  are  manifold  forces  at  work 
while  they  are  at  work,  and  that  some  of  these  forces  are 
antagonistic  and  wayward,  and  even  malignant.  There  is 
a  power  of  self-movement  in  the  plastic  clay.  Your  mold- 
ing touch  may  meet  resisting  and  unyielding  masses  of 
moral  qualities.  The  canvas  is  not  receptive.  Its  texture 
has  an  active  energy  of  color  in  it  which  sometimes  defies 
all  your  combinations.  Green  grows  gray,  and  the  blue  of 
the  sky  on  your  obedient  brush  turns  into  the  blackest 
blackness  in  your  picture.  And  it  is  through  no  fault  of 
yours.  But  count  not  too  much  on  effects  in  character 
through  applications  you  may  attempt.  Hold  the  "sheet 
of  white  paper"  to  the  light  or  warm  it  by  certain  fires  and 
you  will  weep  to  see  your  fixed  theory  of  first  impressions 
blotted  out  by  blood  and  texture. 

Shall,  we,  therefore,  cease  our  efforts  to  fashion  early 
character?  Nay,  verily,  rather  let  us  redouble  our  efforts. 
But  remember  the  clay,  the  canvas,  and  the  paper;  and  re- 


INTRODUCTION. 


member  the  unaccountable  and  insidious,  and  invisible  pow- 
ers that  are  at  work  before  you,  with  you,  after  you,  and 
against  you.  Don't  trust  too  much  to  what  you  do  or  say. 
Go  on  doing  and  saying  in  wisest  way,  but  trust  the  invisi- 
ble and  divine  powers  that  work  for  you  rather  than  the 
work  you  carry  on.  And  don't  be  discouraged  at  the  fail- 
ures. Don't  deny  the  radical  and  far-reaching  law  of  char- 
acter because,  for  the  time,  you  are  disappointed  in  results. 
Work  and  work,  but  also  wait  and — trust! 

Of  necessity,  much  work  done  for  children,  by  good  and 
well-meaning  people,  will  seem  like  wasted  work.  But  in 
every  department  of  God's  church  there  is  much  apparent 
waste.  In  reality,  however,  there  is  less  loss  than  casual 
observers  or  over-sensitive  critics  imagine. 

Let  us  conduct  well  the  work  we  attempt,  that  it  may 
avoid  as  far  as  possible  all  mistakes.  Let  not  our  work  be 
weak  and  irrational;  let  it  not  lack  what  children  most 
appreciate — good  common  sense;  let  it  not  be  based  on 
false  ideas  of  the  child's  intellectual  capacity,  of  his  pre- 
conceived notions,  of  his  state  of  development,  of  his  tastes 
and  needs  and  desires;  let  it  not  overvalue  his  transient 
emotions;  let  it  not  confound  natural  conditions  and  effects 
with  spiritual  illuminations  and  impulses.  And  let  us 
remember  that  all  treatment  of  childhood  based  on  such 
misapprehensions  will  work  evil  instead  of  good,  and  this  in 
spite  of  the  sincere  motives  of  the  instructors. 

But,  on  the  other  hand,  let  us  not  allow  solicitude  about 
the  dangers  which  encompass  the  peculiar  service  to  which 
we  are  here  called,  to  discourage  us  from  entering  upon  its 
duties.  Better  that  a  few  seeds  go  on  rock  and  wayside, 
into  thorny  thickets  or  superficial  soil,  than  that  no  seed  at 
all  goes  into  good  ground.     Let  not  our  solicitude  about 


xii 


INTRODUCTION. 


"  wisdom  "  be  used  by  the  subtle  enemy  of  souls  to  defeat 
all  efforts  for  souls. 

I  welcome  this  help  as  designed  to  increase  the  wisdom 
and  resources  of  parents  and  teachers.  I  could  not  expect  to' 
endorse  all  the  devices,  directions  or  models  of  a  book 
drawing  upon  such  a  number  and  variety  of  authorities  as 
does  the  present  volume,  but  in  it  will  be  found  many 
suggestions,  many  models  and  manifold  material. 

May  the  spirit  of  God  be  in  the  wheels! 
New  York,  March,  1884. 


GOD'S ''CALL"  TO  WORK. 


13 


CHAPTER  I. 
GOD'S  "CALL"  TO  WORK. 

Once  in  a  city  court,  a  very  small  man  was  pushing  his  way  through  the 
crowd.  Sonie  one  sternly  inquired,  "What  are  you  pushing  for?"  "Why,' was 
the  instant  answer,  "did  you  r.ot  hear?  lam  called!''  Instantly  all  made  way. 
Just  so  when  the  Redeemer  wants  3'cu.  Stand  away,  devils ;  stand  away,  doubts ; 
stand  away,  fears;  stand  away,  angels— everybody  I  Christ  calls  me.  Stand 
away !  "I  am  called :  "  B.F.Jacobs. 

Every  one  of  God's  children  is  called  to  some  special 
work.  A  call  into  the  Kingdom  means  a  call  into  the 
Harvest-Field.  The  House-Holder,  taking  a  far  journey- 
gave  "to  every  man  his  work.'  The  Master,  who  looked 
at  the  fainting  and  scattered  multitude  and  turned  in  an 
agony  of  compassion  to  those  who  prayed,  saying,  Pray 
ye  therefore  the  Lord  of  the  harvest  that  He  will  send 
forth  laborers  into  His  harvest,"  will  find  room  in  the 
harvest-field  for  the  humblest  of  His  servants,  and  work 
for  the  weakest  and  most  unskillful  hand. 

You  have  never  heard  His  call  to  you  ?"  Have  you 
ever  listened  for  it  ?  Listen  a  moment.  Lift  your  heart 
and  thought  to  God  as  you  read  these  words.  You  may 
hear  it  now.  There  is  many  a  sweet  word  from  God  that 
the  ears  that  do  not  listen  never  catch.  A  call  to  labor 
among  the  children  would  indeed  be  a  sweet  word,  for  it 
is  especially  true  that  he  that  soweth  here  "receiveth 
wages." 

There  are  three  things  by  which  we  may  determine 
whether  we  are  called  of  God  to  a  p^^rticular  work  or  not : 


14 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


1st.  Ability,  2nd.  Opportunity,  3rd.  Authority,  And 
by  authority  I  mean  the  voice  of  God  to  the  soul  saying, 
"  Go — work."  We  do  not  always  recognize  the  three  a^ 
being  all  present  with  us  at  once,  even  in  case  of  a  true 
Call,  but  the  presence  of  a  single  one  should  arouse  our 
attention  and  make  us  inquire  diligently  whether  God 
has  not  for  us  the  other  two  also.  Neither  is  there  any 
fixed  order  in  their  coming.  Many  a  man  has  had  God's 
authority  to  devote  his  life  to  the  ministry — the  inward 
"Go!"  which  he  knows  perfectly,  means  "Woe"  to  him  if 
he  "preach  not  the  Gospel" — when  neither  ability  nor  op- 
portunity is  present.  In  such  cases  both  ability  (though 
sometimes  by  long  training)  and  opportunity  will  come. 
God  never  gives  man  Authority  for  a  work  unless  there 
is  a  work  to  be  done  (Opportunity),  and  the  man  can  de 
it.  (Ability.)  But  Authority  may  not  be  the  first  thing 
to  fix  the  eye  and  mind  of  a  person.  It  may  be  oppor' 
tunity.  And  this  is  especially  true  in  the  more  uncom- 
mon lines  of  work.  Doubtless  Robert  Raikes  felt  no 
special  call  in  the  way  of  Authority  to  gather  the  misera- 
ble children  from  the  streets  of  Gloucester  into  his  first 
germ  of  a  Sunday  School.  His  call  came  Opportunity- 
end  foremost.  And  though  he  little  dreamed  how  great 
a  fire  he  was  kindling,  will  not  millions  of  redeemed  souls 
rise  up  in  the  last  day  and  call  him  blessed,  because  he 
recognized  and  met  his  opportunity. 

Let  me  giye  you  a  more  recent  case.  A  lady  in  one 
of  our  western  towns  gathered  about  her  week  by  week, 
a  few  little  ones  for  a  children's  meeting.  Less  than  a 
dozen  in  all,  it  was  a  very  little  thing,  and  as  the  weeks 
and  months  rolled  by,  it  still  seemed  a  little  thing.  But 
nothing  is  little  with  God.  The  year  rolled  around.  The 


GOnS  "  CALL  "  TO  WORK.  15 

children  were  taught  not  only  to  "love  Jesus"  and  to 
"be  good,"  but  to  reckon  themselves  as  Christians,  and  to 
work  for  Christ  in  talking  to  others  about  Jesus,  and 
praying  earnestly  for  them.  And  they  did  talk,  with  all 
the  directness  and  simplicity  of  childhood — it  is  so  easy 
and  natural  for  a  child  to  talk  about  religion  !  They  did 
pray  with  all  the  mighty  faith  of  childhood;  and  the 
Spirit  of  God,  by  means  of  their  work,  shook  the  whole 
town  from  center  to  circumference.  It  was  called  a  "  gos- 
pel hardened  "  place,  but  it  was  not  hard  enough  to  bear 
unmoved  the  gospel  from  the  lips  of  the  children.  Young 
men  who  had  been  thinking  of  anything  but  religion,  and 
young  ladies  deep  in  the  frivolities  of  the  world,  came 
seeking  salvation  when  they  saw  the  little  ones  pressing 
on  before  them,  and  even  the  gray-haired  came  late  to 
the  kingdom  led  by  the  hand  of  "  a  little  child."  Reader^ 
could  yoii  not  make  a  beginning  of  work,  as  great  as  the 
beginning  of  the  work  just  described?  Could  you  not 
gather  about  you  a  few  little  children  week  by  week,  in- 
structing them  more  personally  than  it  is  possible  to  do 
in  the  Sunday  school  in  the  things  of  the  Kingdom, 
teaching  them  to  pray  and  praying  with  them,  and  send- 
ing them  out,  willing  laborers  as  they  are,  to  active  work 
for  the  Master  ?  Such  a  door  of  Opportunity  may  be 
low,  but  it  is  golden.  If  it  opens  before  you  look  up  to 
God  for  Authority.    Listen  for  His  voice. 

"Ah,  but,"  perhaps  you  say,  "the  third  test  of  the 
call  surely  fails  in  my  case.  I  have  n't  the  Ability.  I  can 
not  do  it.  I  can't  talk  to  children."  But  have  you  tried? 
Surely,  if  God  calls,  he  "will  be  with  your  mouth." — "And 
I  haven't  tim^e  with  all  the  calls  of  society,'"'  But  surely 
you  do  not  mean  that  the  calls  of  society,  however  legiti- 


16 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


mate  and  urgent,  can  rival  God's  Call? — "And  my  sew- 
ing." But  the  extra  sewing  might  be  left  undone.  Bet- 
ter an  hour  spent  in  adorning  the  soul  of  a  child  than 
the  skirt  of  a  dress.  Or  the  one  could  be  intrusted  to 
hired  hands  more  safely  than  the  other. — "And  it  would  re- 
quire so  much  training  ! "  But  that  is  one  of  the  greatest 
blessings  of  a  Call  to  work.  It  always  means  a  call  to 
preparation  for  work.  No,  no  !  None  of  these  objections 
settle  the  question  about  ability.  Have  you  tried  to 
use  what  ability  you  have?  Have  you  put  your  one  tal- 
ent "to  the  exchangers?"  Remember,  the  unfaithful 
servant  was  condemned  not  for  wasting  or  misappropriat- 
ing his  talent,  but  for  simply  neglecting  it.  It  was  not 
enough  to  bury  it  in  the  earth,  even  though  it  was  de- 
cently wrapped  in  a  napkin  and  safely  kept.  A  man  is 
not  eager  to  say  in  lines  of  worldly  work  "I  can  not  do 
it."  Look  within,  honestly,  for  Ability;  look  around, 
eagerly,  for  Opportunity;  look  up,  earnestly,  for  Authority; 
and  though  it  may  be  but  to  gather  about  you  a  few  little 
children — a  little  door — who  can  tell  what  glorious  gate- 
ways and  broad  fields  of  usefulness  may  lie  beyond! 
Who  can  tell  what  God  may  do?  It  may  be  that  the 
Lord  will  work  for"  you,  "for there  is  no  restraint  to  the 
Lord,  to  save  by  many  or  by  few." 


FROM  OUR  NOTE  BOOKS, 


17 


CHAPTER  II. 

FROM  OUR  NOTE  BOOKS. 

HOW  TO  GATHER  THE  CLASS. 

This  will  usually  be  an  easy  matter;  the  very  novelty 
of  a  "Children's  Meeting"  will  generally  attract.  Or 
bright,  illuminated  cards  may  be  handed  or  sent  to  the 
children  with  a  scripture  text  on  one  side  and  the  invita- 
tion to  the  meeting  printed  or  written  on  the  other. 
Or  the  parents  may  be  visited  and  asked  to  send  their 
children.  Most  parents,  whether  Christians  or  not,  will 
cordially  accede  to  such  a  request,  while  the  opportunity 
will  be  excellent  for  personal  work  in  the  families  visited. 
Do  not  be  deterred  from  undertaking  the  Meeting,  even 
if  only  a  small  beginning  can  be  made.  If  possible,  find 
a  few  converted  children  and  impress  on  them  their  re- 
sponsibility for  their  unsaved  companions.  It  is  a  good 
plan  to  interest  the  boys  first,  and  thereby  insure  their 
attendance  and  co-operation  in  the  meetings.  The  ages 
of  the  members  usually  range  from  six  to  fourteen  years. 
HOW  TO  KEEP  THE  CLASS. 

Feed  them.  Little  lambs,  as  well  as  the  older  sheep, 
linger  around  the  places  where  they  are  fed.  Give  them 
food  from  the  Bible,  food  from  your  own  experience, 
food  prepared  for  them  by  honest  effort  and  earnest 
thought.     Charming  stories,  beautiful  pictures,  sweet 


.8 


CJTILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


songs — these  are  all  excellent  and  valuable  as  condiments, 
but  nothing  of  this  kind — nor  of  any  other  kind — will 
take  the  place  of  food.  Yet  the  food  should  be  made 
simple  and  palatable,  and  served  up  as  attractively  as 
possible.  Then,  too,  if  by  means  of  the  teaching,  chil- 
dren can  only  be  converted  and  actively  interested  in 
work  for  others,  there  will  be  little  fear  of  their  neglect- 
ing the  Meetings.  Some  wise  man  says  about  attend- 
ance at  Sunday  school — and  it  is  quite  in  point  here — 
"Boys  and  girls  leave  the  Sunday  school  at  fourteen  be- 
cause they  are  not  converted  at  thirteen." 

THE  ROOM. 

A  room  in  the  church  will  perhaps  be  available.  But 
some  not-over-nice  room  of  a  private  house  may  be  more 
convenient  and  home-like. 

FURNITURE. 

The  brighter  and  pleasanter  the  room  is  the  better, 
but  the  only  furniture  positively  necessary  is  comfortable 
chairs  or  seats,  and  a  blackboard,  or  some  substitute  for 
a  blackboard.  A  sheet  of  common  light  brown  wrapping 
paper,  with  a  half-burned  wood  coal,  or  oil  crayon  or 
charcoal  pencil  (cost  five  or  ten  cents)  answers  admirably 
for  object  and  analytical  work,  and  a  large  slate  with 
white  crayon  or  even  note  books  in  the  hands  of  the  class 
often  serve  valuable  ends. 

MAPS. 

These  will  be  found  Very  useful  in  historical  lessons. 
If  no  wall  maps  can  be  had,  or  even  if  they  can,  draw  a 
map  on  the  board,  or  ask  the  children  to  bring  their  own 
geographies  from  school,  and  in  them  locate  the  places 
mentioned. 


FROM  OUR  NOTE  BOOKS. 


19 


CONNECTED  LESSONS, 

for  a  series  of  meetings  are  earnestly  recommended.  As 
an  example  we  have  given  the  series  on  the  Lord's  Prayer, 
in  the  Outlines  also  the  Normal  Lessons  and  the 
series  on  the  Beatitudes.  Such  connection,  in  historical 
lessons  carried  on  from  week  to  week,  seems  alrnost 
essential. 

PROGRAMS — DEFINITE  NUMBER  OF  MEETINGS. 

Programs  or  lesson-lists,  attractively  printed,  or — if 
the  class  is  not  too  large — written,  are  within  the  reach 
of  most  leaders.  Use  papyrograph  or  electric  pen,  or 
buy  medium  sized  illuminated  cards  and  write,  or  print 
with  pen,  compactly  on  the  back  of  each  card,  the  subjects 
of  the  lessons  for  a  month  or  term.  (See  page  162.)  Chil- 
dren should  take  these  home,  where  they  will  be  a  re- 
minder to  both  parent  and  child.  The  advantages  of  a 
definite  and  limited  course  are  sometimes  very  great 
Children  will  often  attend  a  course  of  eight  or  ten  les- 
sons, the  subjects  of  which  they  are  able  to  carry  home  on 
a  card,  when  they  would  not  attend  an  indefinite  Meet- 
ing." And  the  work  of  the  Leader  may  be  none  the  less 
continuous  and  effective,  for  one  course  may  follow  an- 
other with  little  or  no  intermission. 

ORDER  OF  EXERCISES. 

The  following  order  of  exercises  is  suggested.  It  has 
been  found  practical  in  some  classes,  but  in  particular 
cases  may  need  to  be  modified : 

Prayer.  Recitation  of  Scripture  Texts.  Roll-call. 
Lesson.  Prayer.  Testimonies.  Prayers  by  the  Chil- 
dren.   Singing,  interspersed  as  desired. 


■* 

20 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


RECITATION  OF  SCRIPTURE  TEXTS. 

Let  every  child  be  prepared  with  a  Scripture  text 
to  repeat  at  each  meeting.  The  benefits  of  this  are  ob- 
vious; famiHarity  with  Scripture,  a  sense  of  helping" 
in  the  meeting,  etc. 

THE  ROLL-CALL — BIBLE-READING. 

The  roll  should  embrace  the  names  of  all  who  have 
promised  regular  attendance  upon  the  meetings.  Do 
not  neglect  your  opportunity  of  training  the  children 
in  the  habitual  reading  of  the  Bible.  All  who  have 
read  the  Bible  every  day  in  the  week,  or,  if  too  young 
to  read,  have  repeated  a  verse  after  some  older  person, 
each  day,  might  report     perfect"  at  roll-call. 

THE  LESSON. 

Let  the  lesson  be  simple  and  pointed,  with  practical 
application  for  both  Christians  and  the  unconverted. 
We  earnestly  recommend  the  use  of  the  blackboard,  if 
only  for  writing  outlines. 

TESTIMONIES. 

Occasionally  call  for  testimonies  from  the  Christian 
children,  if  there  are  such  in  the  class.  Valuable  train- 
ing may  thus  be  given,  so  that  children  will  be  able  to 
speak  freely  and  helpfully,  from  a  verse  of  Scripture. 

Or  have  them  report  on  their  progress  during  the 
week,  especially  their  efforts  to  lead  others  to  Jesus. 
Christian  children  are  often  able  to  do  the  best  kind  of 
personal  work,  and  all  such  efforts  should  be  recognized 
and  encouraged,  as  well  as  directed,  by  older  Christians. 
PRAYERS. 

At  close  of  the  testimonies,  give  opportunity  to  the 
unconverted  to  ask  for  prayers,  as  in  other  meetings. 


FROM  OUR  NOTE  BOOKS, 


21 


Then  call  for  short,  direct  prayers  from  the  Christians, 
and,  perhaps  from  the  inquirers  themselves. 

DISORDER. 

W^hat  physicians  call  ''prophylactic" — preventive 
treatment  is  very  important  in  the  matter  of  disorder 
among  children.  Remove  any  possible  occasion  for 
disorder.  Let  boys'  hats,  and  parasols  and  mittens,  be 
put  safely  out  of  sight.  Be  wise  in  seating  the  children. 
Throw  responsibility  upon  them.  Make  Johnny  in  a 
whispered  word  feel  responsible  for  the  behavior  of 
little  Jim,  who  sits  by  his  side.  Sometimes  it  works 
admirably  to  make  certain  older  children  officers,  with 
the  Leader  as  commander-in-chief.  Be  sure  and  give 
the  children,  especially  the  restless  and  mischievous 
ones,  something  to  to  do — yes,  all  they  can  do,  and 
that  all  the  time.  If  our  first  suggestion  under  this 
head  was  prophylactic,  this  might  be  called  pre-empt- 
ive treatment.  Occupy  the  ground  so  thoroughly  that 
there  will  not  be  foot-hold  for  the  enemy.  But  if  dis- 
order actually  breaks  out,  try  first,  by  all  means,  the 
counter-irritant,  or  divertive  treatment.  Write  a  word 
or  make  a  symbol  on  the  blackboard.  Tell  a  story. 
Talk  with  increased  animation ;  direct  your  words  toward 
the  offenders;  ask  them  a  question.  These  methods 
usually  accomplish  their  purpose.  If  not,  try  the  direct 
method — earnest  remonstrance  with  the  offender  per- 
sonally. But  this  should  always  be  out  of  meeting, 
and  usually  with  each  one  alone.  Detain  the  offender, 
and  tell  him  that  such  disorder  is  a  pain  and  grief  to 
you,  and  to  God.  Ask  him  never  to  repeat  it,  and  as- 
sure him  kindly,  but  firmly,  that  it  must  not  be  repeated. 


22 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


NEVER  TIRED,  TO  THE  WORK. 
Leading  a  children's  meeting  is  very  difficult  and 
exhausting  work.  The  leader  should  never  come  to 
the  meeting  weary,  either  in  mind  or  body.  The  half- 
hour  before  the  meeting  should  be  spent,  if  possible, 
in  quiet  preparation,  the  most  valuable  part  of  which 
should  be  drawing  strength  from  the  Source  of  all 
Strength. 

RECEIVE  ALL  HONEST  ANSWERS. 

Never  discourage  a  child's  effort  to  answer  correctly, 
by  replying  No,"  what-everhe  may  say.  Find  some- 
thing good  in  every  answer.  If  you  ask  how  many 
Apostles  there  were,  and  a  child  says  Eleven  "  reply, 
"  Yes,  there  were  eleven,  but  were  there  not  more? 
How  many  more?  "  If  the  child  said  Thirteen  " 
reply,  Almost  right,  but  were  there  quite  so  many?  " 
A  wise  teacher  may  be  known  by  the  way  she  receives 
and  utilizes  all  kinds  of  answers. 

DEFINITENESS. 

Give  definite  instructions.  Pray,  and  teach  the 
children  to  pray,  definitely — for  just  what  they  want. 
Expect  definite  things.  Remember,  the  first  great  ob- 
ject of  a  children's  prayer-meeting  is  the  conversion  of 
the  children;  the  second,  and  it  also  is  great,  though  so 
often  neglected  in  work  among  children,  is  the  train- 
ing— the  building-up  in  Christ,  of  the  converted 
childre... 

KEEP  ON. 

Keep  on  teaching.  Keep  on  trying  new  plans. 
Keep  on  expecting.  Keep  on  praying;  and  the  God 
of  Israel  grant  thy  petition!'* 


TRAINING  CHRISTIAN  CHILDREN. 


23 


CHAPTER  III.  . 

TRAINING  CHRISTIAN  CHILDREN, 

Training,  is  the  great  requirement  of  the  present  age. 
Every  calling  in  life  demands  preparation;  natural  ability 
and  irregular,  unguided  development  are  not  enough. 
As  soon  as  a  person  has  chosen  his  life-work,  he  begins 
to  prepare  himself  for  it.  So,  when  a  person  has  decided 
to  follow  Christ,  and  become  a  fisher  of  men,"  training 
should  begin  at  once. 

It  is  not  enough  to  have  become  a  Christian,  to  have 
in  view  a  life  of  work  for  God ;  but  one  should,  even  in 
childhood,  be  "  about  his  Father's  business."  Therefore, 
as  soon  as  a  child  is  "  in  the  way  he  should  go,"  he  should 
be  ''trained  up''  in  that  way. 

We  do  not  leave  a'  child  to  himself  in  his  physical  and 
intellectual  growth;  neither  should  we  disregard  his  need 
of  help  in  spiritual  development.  Yet,  how  little  direct 
attention  is  paid  to  the  child's  spiritual  needs  after  his 
conversion  !  A  young  lady,  having  been  a  member  of  the 
church  two  or  three  years,  was  once  heard  bitterly  regret- 
ting her  church  relation;  " because,"  said  she, before  I 
joined  the  church,  people  used  to  talk  to  me,  and  show 
some  interest  in  me,  but  now  no  one  ever  says  a  word  to 
me !" 


24 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


And  even  when  we  do  remember  them,  is  not  our 
work  too  general  ?  We  seem  to  expect  the  lambs  to 
flourish  if  treated  in  the  same  way  we  treat  the  sheep. 
Certainly  this  was  not  the  Master  s  plan,  or  He  would 
not  have  given  the  separate  injunctions :  "  Feed  my 
lambs,"  "  Feed  my  sheep."  And  may  there  not  be  in  the 
order  of  the  passages  a  hint  that  the  lambs  should  be 
looked  after  first  ?  This  is  certainly  the  only  sure 
way  to  promote  the  health  and  strength  of  the  whole 
flock. 

A  farmer  s  boy,  whose  business  it  was  to  tend  sheep, 
once  contrived  a  plan  by  which  his  lambs  should  be  in 
better  condition  than  those  of  his  neighbor.  Instead  of 
keeping  the  flock  all  together,  he  put  the  lambs  in  a 
smaller  inclosure  within  the  fold.  His  care  was  richly 
repaid.  Equally  successful  are  the  special  efforts  put 
forth  for  young  converts  in  the  church. 

An  Englishman  once  said,  "  You  can  make  something 
out  of  a  Scotchman,  if  you  catch  him  young !"  We  have 
the  same  assurance  concerning  Christian  workers :  there 
is  great  hope  of  their  usefulness,  you  catch  them 
young"  for  long  and  effective  training. 

There  is  danger  in  leaving  the  child  to  untrained 
growth,  but  it  is  also  injurious  to  take  the  matter  quite  out 
of  his  hands.  The  idea  of  his  responsibility  for  growth 
and  for  work,  should  be  kept  before  him,  and  the  help 
received  from  outside  should  be  in  the  line  of  suggestions. 
The  leader  s  business  is  to  set  him  at  work,  and  to  direct 
his  work,  rather  than  to  do  the  work  for  him.  With 
such  assistance  and  stimulus  he  will  form  right  habits, 
and  acquire  the  elements  of  a  sturdy  Christian  character. 

The  following  are  habits  which  should  be  cultivated 


TRAINING  CHRISTIAN  CHILDREN.  25 


by  a  young  convert :  Prayer,  frequent  and  unhurried ; 
systematic  Bible-study;  regular  attendance  upon  religious 
services;  systematic  and  proportionate  giving;  testi- 
mony at  every  opportunity;  familiar  conversation  on 
Christian  experience;  and  personal  work  with  the 
unconverted. 

Among  the  helps  that  should  be  given  a  Christian 
child  in  forming  these  habits  are:  A  family  altar  at 
home;  full  church  membership ;  thorough  Sunday-school 
instruction ;  membership  in  a  well-organized  children's 
meeting;  a  well-bound,  good-print  Reference  Bible,  and 
other  printed  matter,  as  the  child  may  be  able  to  bear  it. 
We  cannot  forbear  to  mention  a  few  books  and  leaflets 
that  have  come  to  our  notice,  as  being  specially  inspiring 
to  young  Christians  :  Miss  Havergal's  "  Kept  for  the 
Masters  Use;"  Mrs.  Smiths  "Christian's  Secret;" 
Moody's  "How  to  Study  the  Bible,"  "How  to  Hold 
Inquiry  Meetings,"  "  Secret  Power,"  etc.;  Biography  of 
"  Uncle  John  Vassar,"  Henry  Morehouse,  and  C.  G.  Fin- 
ney. Some  of  these  books  may  seem  rather  strong  meat 
for  children,  and  indeed  they  should  be  recommended 
with  a  view  to  the  needs  of  each  case.  But  Christian 
children,  in  the  warmth  of  their  love  and  zeal,  will  often 
surprise  us  by  the  relish  with  which  they  will  appropri- 
ate works  on  even  the  "  deep  things  of  God."  The  writer 
well  remembers  the  zest  with  which,  when  a  young  con- 
vert, thirteen  years  old,  she  read  such  books  as  "  Memoirs 
of  Edward  Payson."  There  is,  moreover,  much  safe  and 
rich  literature  published  in  tract  form.  Every  leader  of 
children  shouid  be  well  and  constantly  supplied  with  this. 
Notice  advertisements  in  religious  periodicals  and  books. 

Christian  children  should  be  trained  in  direct  mission- 


26 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


ary  work.  Additional  suggestions  will  be  found  in  the 
Missionary  Lessons,  among  the  Outlines. 

And  another  important  branch  of  training  is  to  teach 
them  how  to  pray  and  talk  simply,  directly,  without 
affectation  or  embarrassment,  in  social  meetings.  Fre- 
quent opportunity  to  speak  and  pray,  with  the  example^ 
direction  and  wise  advice  of  the  leader,  will  accomplish 
this  end. 

Once  more,  let  me  urge.,  though  it  be  a  repetition, 
that  the  children  be  taught  to  talk  freely  upon  religious 
subjects  in  familiar  conversation.  Who  does  not  know 
with  what  agonies  of  embarrassment  and  timidity  the 
older,  untrained  Christian  enters  into  personal  work, 
either  among  Christians  or  among  the  unconverted,  in 
those  sadly  ^few  cases  where  it  is  attempted  at  all?  And 
who  does  not  know  that  the  vast  majority  of  Christians 
never  so  much  as  attempt  this  conversational  work? 
Let  us  so  try  to  train  those  who  are  to  come  after  us, 
that  we  may  have  a  return  of  the  time  when  "the 
church  that  was  scattered  abroad,"  (women  and  children, 
as  well  as  men,)  "  went  everywhere,  preaching  the  word," 
and  telling  about  Jesus.  And  so  we  may  have  a  return 
of  Pentecostal  revivals ! 


A  COURSE  OF  NORMAL  LESSONS,  27 


CHAPTER  ly. 
NOFiMAL  LESSONS. 

INTRODUCTORY  NOTE. 

Every  thoughtful  teacher  of  children  must  have 
observed  with  regret  the  lack  of  connected  and  general 
Bible  knowledge  that  exists  among  our  children,  notwith- 
standing the  admirable  system  of  detail  study  planned  by 
the  International  Lesson  Committee.  It  is  desirable,  in 
studying  any  of  the  great  master-pieces  of  painting,  to 
examine  almost  every  square  inch  of  canvas  by  itself — 
to  study  minutely  this  figure,  that  shading,  this  combi- 
nation of  colors.  But  would  not  the  artist-student  lose 
greatly  if  he  failed  to  take  his  stand  farther  away,  and 
look  at  the  picture  as  a  whole?  Our  Sunday-school 
lessons  give  us  the  minute  study  of  the  Bible,  but  we 
need — even  children  need,  with  this,  a  more  general  and 
comprehensive  view ;  a.  view  which  shall  give  an  idea  of 
the  Bible  as  a  unit,  and  show  the  relation  and  harmony 
of  all  its  parts. 

The  following  course  of  Lessons,  whose  design  is  in 
the  direction  indicated  above,  has  been  successfully 
taught  to  classes  of  children,  six  to  thirteen  years  of  age. 
Some  of  the  matter,  as  well  as  the  arrangement  of  Lesson 
I,  is  adapted  from  Vincent.  The  only  absolute  requisite 
for  success  in  teaching  this  course,  is  an  earnest,  enthusi- 
astic teacher — one  so  thoroughly  prepared  as  to  teach 
with  elasticity  and  reserve  force.  Teachers  should  make 
the  lessons  short,  dividing  or  repeating,  if  necessary. 
Review,  at  every  lesson,  the  preceding  lesson,  and  drill  a 
great  deal. 


28 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


I.— THE  BIBLE. 

Names. 

The  Bible.    The  Holy  Scriptures.   The  Word  of 
God.    The  Law  and  the  Prophets.    The  Book  of 
Books. 
Authors."^ 

The  Bible  was  written  by  about  40  men  under  the 
direction  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  during  a  period  of  about 
1500  years.  Call  attention,  simply,  to  the  wonderful 
harmony  of  the  different  parts  of  the  Bible,  tho' 
written  by  so  many  men,  in  so  many  different  styles 
(poetry,  history,  prophecy)  and  during  such  a  long 
period  of  time. 
Contents. 

The  Bible  contains  66  books.      Old  Testament, 
39  books,  written  in  Hebrew.     New  Testament,  27 
books,  written  in  Greek. 
Translation. 

Explain  the  necessity  for  translation.  Tell  of  the 
many  translations  into  the  ancient  and  modern 
languages,  but  drill  especially,  on  the  translations 
into  the  English: 

By  Wycliff,  500  years  ago,  written  only. 

By  Tyndale,  350  years  ago,  written  and  printed. 

By  40  men  under  King  James  L  270  years  ago 
"Our  Bible." 

"Revised  New  Bible, in  188 1  and  1885. 

MEMORY  VERSE, 

(n  the  beginning  God  created  the  heaven  and  the  earth,— Gen,  I.  /. 

*Call  out  from  the  Children  the  names  of  all  the  Bible  Authors  they  can 
give.    Print  upon  board.    The  board  may  be  used  also  under  "  Contents 
and  "  Translation." 


NORMAL  LESSONS, 


29 


II.— THE  BIBLE. 


divisions  and  books. 

Old  Testament. 

G.  E.  L.  N.  D.  (Pentateuch.) 


K.  V2  Ch. 


LE.  N.  E 


Poet.      J.  Ps.  Pr.  Ec.  Can.  - 

f  Major.     I.  J.(L.)E.  D.  - 

fHo-Jo-Am, 
Minor.  ^  Ob-Jo-Mi-Na,  - 
L  Ha-Ze-Ha-Ze-Ma, 


Proph. « 


Total  in  Old  Test. 

New  Testament. 

(  M.  M.  L.  J.  (Gospels.) 
Hist.    {  » 


17 
5 


12 


11 
39 


fR.  >^  Cor  - 
p  J  G.  E.  P.  C.     -  - 

(  Pauline,  j  ^  T.  >^  Tim.  T.  - 
Letters.  \  [  Ph.  H(?). 

(  General.    J.  ^  P.  1-2-3  John.  J. 


Proph.  ■ — Rev. 


Total  in  New  Test. 


14 
7 


21 
I 

27 


MEMORY  VERSE. 

The  grace  of  mr  Lord  Jesus  Christ  be  with  you  all.  Amen. 
Rev.  22.  21. 


30 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


III.— BIBLE  GEOGRAPHY. 


Let  children  come  with  pencil 


and  paper,  prepared  to 
drawmaps.  The  lead- 
er should  first  draw 
the  oblong  on  the 
board,  the  children 
watching  and  copy- 
ing. Notice,  the  fig- 
ure is  twice  as  long 
as  wide.  Encourage 
measurement.  Then 
fill  in  with  such  out- 
lines and  locate  such 
cities  as  the  class  can 
easily  follow  you  in. 

Give  items  of  in- 
formation, such  as  size 
of  countries  and  seas, 
length  of  rivers,  inci- 
dents of  history  con- 
nected with  cities. 

Ask  many  review 
questions.  Call  up 
children  to  point  out 


places  on  maps,  while  the  rest  follow  and  name. 


MEMORY  VERSE. 

Ihp^  earth  is  the  Lord's,  and  the  fulness  thereof;  the  world 
and  they  that  dwell  therein  —Ps,  24.  1. 


NORIJAL  LESSONS, 


31 


IV.— BIBLE  TIME. 

'^A.  D/'TiME. 

Time  from  now  back  to  Christ,  about  1885  years. 

B.  C."  Time. 

Time  from  Christ  back  to  Adam,  about  4000  years. 

Our  Hands, 

May  help  us  to  remember  Bible  Time. 

Draw  a  picture   of  your  out-spread  hand,  hold 

ing  it  firmly  on  paper,  and  marking  evenly  around 

it  with  a  lead  pencil.    Let  each  of  the  spaces 

between  the  fingers  represent  a  thousand  years. 
Mark  the  top  of  the  thumb  Adam.    He  lived  at  the 

beginning  of  Bible  Time. 
Mark  the  first  finger  Enoch.    He  was  translated 

1000  years  after  Adam. 
Mark  the  middle  finger  Abraham.    He  was  born 

2000  years  after  Adam. 
Mark  the  next  finger  Solomon.    He  dedicated  the 

Temple  3000  years  after  Adam. 
Mark  the  last  finger  Jesus  Christ.    He  came  400c 

years  after  Adam. 
Write  across  the  palm,  "Jesus  lived  on  earth  33 

years,"  and  on  the  wrist,  ''The  Apostle  John 

lived  100  years." 
Can  you  find  where  Jared^  Noah,  the  Exodus,  and 

Zerubbabel  belong? 

MEMORY  VERSE. 

Before  the  mountains  were  brought  forth,  or  ever  thou 
hadst  formed  the  earth  and  the  world,  even  from  everlasting 
to  everlasting  thou  art  God—Ps.  90,  2. 


32 


CUT  CD  RE  7^  Mnrmra  s 


v.— BIBLE  TIME  (Continued.) 

Each  of  the  four  thousand  years  between  Adam  and 
Christ  may  be  called  a  Period. 

First  Period. 

In  the  First  Period  lived:  I 
Adam,  Eve,  Cain,  Abel,  Enoch,  and  Methuselah. 
Here  comes  the  story  of  the  first  blessing  upon 
man  (Gen.  i.  28.)  the  first  sin  (Gen.  3.  6.)  the  first 
curse  (Gen.  3.  14-19)  the  first  baby,  the  first 
death,  the  first  murder,  the  first  going  to  Heaven 
without  dying. 

Second  Period. 

In  this  Period  lived : 
Noah;  Shem,  Ham,  and  Japheth. 

Here  comes  the  Flood,  the  Rainbow-Covenant* 
and  Babel. 

Third  Period. 

In  this  Period  lived: 
Abraham  Isaac  and  Jacob,  the  twelve  Patriarchs, 
Moses  and  Joshua,  fourteen  Judges,  Saul  and  David 
the  first  two  kings.  In  this  Period  arose  the  Nation 
of  the  Israelites,  and  here  occurred  their  bondage  in 
Egypt,  the  Exodus,  the  forty  years  wandering  in  the 
Wilderness,  the  settlement  in  the  Promised  Land, 
and  the  establishment  of  a  Monarchy. 

MEMORY  VERSE. 

For  this  God  is  our  God  forever  and  ever,  he  will  be  our 
guide,  even  unto  death— Ps.  48,  !4. 


NORMAL  LESSONS. 


VL— BIBLE  TIME  (Continued.) 
Fourth  Period. 

In  this  period  occurred  the  Division  of  the  Kingdom 
under  Solomon's  son,  much  war  and  trouble,  the 
carrying  away  captive  of  Israel,  the  destruction  ot 
Jerusalem  and  the  seventy  years  captivity  of  Judah, 
the  return  of  the  captives,  and  the  rebuilding  of  the 
City  and  Temple. 
In  this  Period: 

Lived  Twenty  Kings  of  Judah,  in  Southern  Palestine, 
Nineteen  Kings  of  Israel  in  Northern  Palestine,  Dan- 
iel and  his  three  friends,  Queen  Esther,  Zerubbabel, 
Ezra  and  Nehemiah. 
In  this  Period  Lived  and  Prophesied  : 

In  Judah, — Isaiah,  Jeremiah,  Ezekiel,  Daniel,  Malachi. 

In  Israel, — Elijah,  Elisha,  Jonah,  Hosea,  Amos» 
We  will  Remember  :  ^ 

Among  the  Kings  of  Judah  :  Rehoboam,  the  foolish 
King  (II  Chron.  lO:  14,  19.)  A thaliah,  the  bad  queen- 
grandmother  (II  Chron.  22  :  10.)  Joash,  the  ungrate- 
ful King  (II  Chron.  24:  21.  22.)  Hezekiah  and  his 
prayers  (II  Kings,  chapters  19  and  20  )  Josiah,  the 
good  boy-King,  and  Zedekiah,  who  died  at  Baby 
Ion,  but  never  saw  it  (Ezek.  12  ;  13;  Jer.  52  :  10, 11.) 
Among  the  Kings  of  Israel*,  Jereboam,  who  made 
Israel  to  sin  (I  Kings,  14:  1 6)  and  the  wicked  Ahab 
and  his  bad  wife. 

MEMORY  VERSE. 

Whai  iime  I  am  afraid  I  will  trust  in  thee.—Ps.  56.  8 


'^■Leader  may  omit  some  or  all  of  this  paragraph  If  taught,  let  it  be  by  vivid 
word-picturing  in  each  case,  giving  only  one  character  at  a  time.  The  r-hjl^rap 
may  help  by  reading  the  references,  or  some  verses  from  them. 


34 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


VII.— BIBLE  TIME  (Continued.) 

Each  Period 

Of  the  O.  T.  history  covers  i,ooo  years.  The 
whole  N.  T.  history  covers  only  lOO  years. 
At  the  beginning  of  this  Period,  Christ  was  born. 
Christ  was  baptized,  and  began  preaching  when 
thirty  years  old.  He  preached  only  three  and  a  half 
years.  He  was  then  crucified,  but  after  three  days 
rose  from  the  dead,  and,  forty  days  later,  ascended 
into  Heaven. 
To  this  Period  belong  the  twelve  Apostles : 
(A.  P.  o.  S.  T.  L.  e.  S.;   J.  J,  J.  J.  M.  B.f 

Here  also 

Belong  John  the  Baptist;  three  Marys;  Paul, 
the  Apostle  to  the  Gentiles;  Luke,  the  beloved, 
Physician,  and  John,  the  disciple,  whom  specially 
"Jesus  loved." 

At  the  close 

Of  the  Period,  John,  the  last  of  the  Apostles,  died. 
He  was  the  last  of  the  ''Holy  men  of  old"  who 
wrote  the  Bible. 


MEMORY  VERSE. 

Ihou  shali  call  His  name  JESUS,  for  He  shall  save  His 
people  from  their  sins— Matt.  7.  21. 


'*'The  capital  letters  are  the  initials  of  the  names  of  the  twelve  Apostles, 
as  given  in  Matt.,  10. 


NORMAL  LESSONS, 


35 


VIIL— EIGHT  THINGS  TO  REMEMBER. 

DOCTRINE. 

1.  We  have  all  sinned. 

God  takes  care  of  little  children.  After  that  time,  all 
who  are  not  Christians  are  sinners.    (Matt.  1 2 :  30.) 

2.  God  loves  us  all. 

Not  the  good  only,  but  the  good  and  bad. — (John 
3:  16.) 

3.  Jesus  Christ  has  died  to  save  us. 

He  came  to  earth  that  we  might  go  to  Heaven;  He 
became  poor  that  we  might  be  rich;  He  died  that 
we  might  live. — (Is.  53:  5.) 

1 ,  We  must  repent,  forsake  our  sins,  and  trust 
IN  God. 

Then  God  will  forgive  our  sins,  and  give  us  new 
hearts.    This  is  "conversion."    (Acts  3:  19.) 

5.  There  is  a  Heaven  and  a  Hell. 

But  the  Savior  came  to  open  the  way  to  the  first, 
and  save  from  the  last,  if  we  only  will  come  to 
Him. — (John  5  :  29  and  40.) 

6.  Christians  must  grow  in  grace. 

Conversion  is  only  the  beginning. — (2  Peter  3:  18.} 

7.  And  strive  to  bring  others  to  Christ. 

Even  children  may  do  this  — (Prov.  20:  11.) 

8.  The  Holy  Spirit  will  guide  and  help. 

We  need  never  work  alone. — (John  14:  17.) 

MEMORY  VERSE. 

Herein  is  my  Father  glorified  fhait  ye  bear  much 
fruit-John  15.  8. 


36 


CHILDREN  S  MEE  TINGS. 


IX.— GETTING  READY  FOR  EXAMINATION, 

REVIEW. 

Things  to  be  brought.* 

A  good,  sharp  pencil — good,  ruled  paper — a  smooth 
book  to  write  on — a  sharp  pen-knife — a  clear  head. 
Things  to  remember. 

About  the  Bible.  Its  names — its  authors — authority 
— time  of  writing — number  and  names  of  its 
books — languages  in  which  it  was  written — some- 
thing about  its  translations — reasons  why  we 
know  it  is  true. 

About  Bible  Time,  How  the  hand  may  teach 
time — how  to  name  each  finger — the  years 
between — the  palm — the  wrist.  How  many  year? 
since  Christ  came. 

About  Bible  History,  The  noted  people  and  great 
events  of  the  Old  Testament  Periods — the  life  of 
our  Savior,  His  Apostles,  and  associates. 

About  Bible  Doctrine,  The  fact  of  sin — love — 
atonement  —  repentance  —  faith  —  conversion  — 
growth — work — guidance. 

About  Memory  VtrSes,  Recite  them  all  with  the 
teacher,  and  alone.  Drill  on  completing  any  one, 
if  part  is  given. 

MEMORY  VERSE. 

The  grace  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ  be  with  you  all.  Amen. 
Rev.  22.  2/. 


*0r  the  examination  may  be  oral,  with  children  too  young  to  write 
In  this  case,  care  must  be  taken  that  the  children  are  not  helped  by  each 
Oth^r'^  answers.    Examine  them   one  by  one,  and  privately. 


HE  A  VEN. 


37 


CHAPTER  V. 
HEAVEN. 

(All  outline  filled  up  for  specimen.) 

Our  lesson  to-day  is  to  be  about  a  place — maybe 
you  would  call  it  a  lesson  in  geography — the  place  of  all 
others  you  would  like  most  to  know  about.  Can  you 
think  what  place  it  is?  All  of  us  have  friends  there,  and  all 
of  us  expect  to  go  there  by  and  by — though  we  do  not 
all  think  enough  about  how  we  shall  get  there. 
^'Europe?  California?"  Do  you  all  expect  to  go  to 
Europe  ?  Ah  !  Mary  has  it — Heaven.  Heaven  is  the 
place  we  are  going  to  study  about  to-day,  let  us  print 
the  name  at  the  top  of  this  blackboard. 

How  many  of  you  have  heard  about  Heaven  before? 
No,  I  won't  ask  that  question,  for  you  have  all  heard 
about  it.  But  where  do  we  learn  about  Heaven?  Who 
told  you  about  it?  "  Mama."  But  how  did  Mama  know? 
Or  the  minister  or  teacher?  We  know  about  Europe  be- 
cause folks  have  been  there  and,  coming  back,  have  told 
us  about  it.  Did  you  ever  know  of  anyone  who  had 
been  to  Heaven  and  come  back  again  ?  There  was  one. 
man  who  came  to  this  earth  from  Heaven — don't  you  re- 
member?   The  Lord  Jesus.    He  told  us  about  it — "  In 


38 


CHILDREN'S  MS E  TINGS, 


my  Father's  house  are  many  mansions.  I  go  to  prepare 
a  place  for  you."  Then  there  was  another  man,  John, 
one  of  Jesus'  dear  friends  when  He  was  on  earth,  who 
was  permitted  to  look  into  Heaven  and  see  many  things 
there,  before  he  died;  and  he  has  told  us  a  great  deal 
about  that  beautiful  city.  What  book  are  all  these 
things  written  in  ?  Can  you  think  ?  Yes,  the  Bible.  Is 
there  any  other  book  but  the  Bible  that  tells  us  about 
Heaven?"  "Singing-books?"  "Sunday-school  books?" 
Yes,  sometimes,  but  where  do  they  get  what  they  tell 
us  ?  Out  of  the  Bible — there  is  no  other  source,  no 
other  book  in  the  whole  world  that  tells  us  the  leasf 
thing  about  that  place  but  God's  own  precious  Book.  A 
gentleman  was  once  going  to  preach  a  sermon  on  Heaven, 
and  one  of  his  friends  was  very  anxious  to  hear  it,  for  he 
wanted  to  hear  something  new  about  that  place.  When 
the  sermon  was  over,  some  one  asked  the  friend  how  he  liked 
it.  "I  did  not  like  it  at  all,'  he  answered,  "he  didn't  tell 
us  anything  but  what  was  in  the  Bible."  But  don't  you 
see,  that  is  all  there  is  to  tell !  Other  books  may  tell  us 
what  folks  guess  and  suppose  about  Heaven,  but  it  is 
the  Bible  alone  that  tells  us  things  that  are  sure — things 
that  we  may  know. 

Now  I  am  going  to  ask  you  some  questions  about 
Heaven.  I  will  print  these  questions  on  the  board,  and 
I  will  put  the  answers  there,  too,  as  soon  as  you  give 
them  to  me — for  you  see  I  am  going  to  ask  you  to  help 
me  in  this  lesson.  Here  is  the  first  question — spell  it  out 
as  I  write  it.  What  kind  of  a  place  is  Heaven?  Who'll 
be  the  first  to  think  of  an  answer  to  this  question?  "A 
good  place,"  Willie  says.    Yes,  indeed.  Heaven  is  a  good 


HE  A  VEN, 


39 


place.  It  is  the  place  Jesus  has  gone  to  prepare  for  us 
and  from  that  alone  we  may  be  sure  it  is  a  good  place.  But 
can  you  not  think  of  something  else — some  particular 
thing  in  which  Heaven  is  good.'^  You  cannot  think? 
Well,  suppose  we  go  straight  to  the  Bible.  Here  is  Mr. 
Blank,  your  minister,  with  his  Bible.  I'll  ask  him  to  read 
averse  for  us.  Listen  now.  (Pastor  reads,  according  to 
pre-arrangement .) 

"And  /,  John,  saw  the  Holy  City,  New  Jerusalem 
^  ^  ^  pared  as  a  br'^^^^  adorned  for  her  hus- 
band ^    Rev:  XXI.  2. 

Do  you  know  what  a  "bride"  is?  I  see  you  know, 
but  you  are  afraid  to  tell.  A  lady  who  has  just  been — 
'^married."  Did  you  ever  see  a  bride?  What  kind  of  a 
dress  did  she  have  on?  "White  dress."  "Nice  dress.'* 
Yes,  the  very  best  things — the  most  beautiful  dress  a 
woman  ever  has,  she  has  when  she  is  married.  And  John 
saw  Heaven  adorned  in  this  way,  "like  a  bride  prepared 
for  her  husband."  Does  n't  it  make  you  think  of  another 
answer  we  may  write  to  our  question  ?  Heaven  is  a 
beautiful  place.  If  I  had  time  I'd  like  to  tell  you  of 
its  mansions  and  streets,  its  River  of  Life,  and  trees  and 
fruits — oh,  yes!  we  may  think  our  very  best  about  Heaven, 
and  when  we  have  pictured  to  ourselves  the  loveliest 
place  we  can  possibly  dream  of,  it  won't  be  half  as  beauti- 
ful as  Heaven  really  is — a  "beautiful"  place,  indeed! 

Now  if  you  do  not  think  of  another  answer  to  our 
question  soon,  I'll  ask  Mr.  Blank  to  read  again. 

And  he  that  talked  with  me  had  a  golden  reed  to 
measure  the  city ,  ^  ^  ^  And  he  measured 
the  city  with  the  reed,  twelve  thousand  furlongs.  The 


40 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


length  and  the  breadth  and  th^  height  of  it  are  e quail' 
Rev,  21  :  15-16. 

Twelve  thousand  furlongs  !  How  many  furlongs  in 
a  mile?  Eight.  That  would  make  fifteen  hundred 
miles.^  How  large  is  Chicago  ?  Eight  or  ten  miles  each 
way.  But  this  city  is  fifteen  hundred  miles  each  way, 
and  fifteen  hundred  miles  high,  too,  ''What  does  that 
mean,"  do  you  ask?  Indeed  I  don't  know, and  I  suppose 
we  shall  have  to  wait  to  see  the  city  before  we  can  find 
out.  But  when  I  think  of  the  length  and  the  breadth  of 
it,  I  remember  that  it  would  be  about  as  large  as  the 
whole  known  world  was,  when  this  description  of  Heaven 
was  written.  So  I  think  it  all  means  that  Heaven  is  a 
large  place.  Plenty  of  room  in  it  for  all  who  may  wish 
to  enter. 

But  what  is  said  in  the  first  of  the  12th  verse,  Mr.Blank? 

"  And  it  had  a  wall  great  and  high!'  Rev,  21  :  12. 

Can  you  think  why  the  city  was  shown  to  John  as  hav- 
ing a  wall  around  it  ?  Were  you  ever  in  a  walled  city  ?  "They 
don't  have  walls,"  Johnny  says.  Our  cities  in  America 
do  not,  because  they  have  all  been  built  within  a  few  hun- 
dred years;  but  in  the  old  times,  before  men  knew  any- 
thing about  the  cannon-balls,  when  they  wanted  to 
make  a  city  very  safe,  they  built  a  strong  wall  about  it. 
Then,  if  the  wall  was  strong  enough,  no  enemy  from  with- 
out could  harm  them,  and  the  people  inside  were  safe. 
Doesn't  this  make  you  think  what  the  Bible  means  by 
telling  us  that  the  heavenly  city  has  a  "great  and  high" 
wall  around  it  ?  That  Heaven  is  a  safe  place.   We'll  write 


*If  the  class  is  advanced  enough  to  assist  in  the  work,  this  example  in 
••Reduction"  may  be  wrought  out  before  them  on  the  board. 


HE  A  VEN. 


41 


that  word  "safe"  on  the  black-board  just  below  the  word 
"  large." 

I  wish  I  could  tell  you  all  about  the  walls,  how  grand 
and  glorious  they  are,  and  what  beautiful  stones  they  are 
made  of.  And  then  the  Gates — twelve  beautiful  gates 
each  of  one  pearl,  three  on  the  east  and  three  on  the 
west  and  three  on  the  north  and  three  on  the  south — so 
people  may  come  in  from  all  parts  of  the  earth,  I  suppose. 
These  gates  are  always  open  by  day;  and  that  makes  me 
thitik  of  another  thing  about  Heaven.  What  kind  of 
lights  do  they  have  there?  Candles.^  or  lamps?  Ah! 
Annie  has  something  to  say.  "  There  is  no  night  there. " 
Annie  is  right;  there  is  no  night  there.  Let  us  hear  Mr. 
Blank  read  about  it  out  of  God's  word. 

"'And  the  city  had  no  need  of  the  sun,  neither 
of  the  moon  to  shine  in  it :  for  the  glory  of  God 
did  lighten  it,  and  the  Lamb  is  the  light  thereof. 
And  the  gates  of  it  shall  not  be  shut  at  all  by 
day,  for  there  shall  be  no  night  there!'  —  Rev.  21: 
23,  25. 

No  night  there.  Heaven  is  a  light  place,  let  us  put 
that  upon  the  black-board.  How  many  of  you  like  the 
bright  day-time  better  than  the  night  ?  What !  all  of  you  ? 
Children  always  do.  But  do  you  know  why  grown  up 
folks  often  long  for  the  night  to  come  ?  Because  they  are 
tired  and  sad  and  sick.  Will  any  one  ever  be  tired  in 
Heaven?    Mr.  Blank,  read  the  4th  verse  of  chapter  21st. 

And  God  shall  wipe  away  all  tears  from  their 
eyes;  and  there  shall  be  no  more  death,  neither 
sorrow  nor  crying,  neither  shall  there  be  any  more 
pain :  for  the  former  things  are  passed  away!' 


42 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


Oh  !  children,  children,  think  of  that  !  No  more  pain ! 
How  many  of  you  were  ever  sick — real  sick,  and  had  hard 
pain  ?  Why,  almost  all  of  you  are  raising  your  hands. 
And  I  don't  need  to  ask  how  many  times  you  have  cried, 
for  I  hear  almost  every  day,  the  sound  of  some  little  child's 
crying.  But  nobody  will  ever  be  in  pain  in  Heaven,  and 
no  little  baby's  cry  will  ever  be  heard  in  that  city.  Older 
people  cry  too,  down  here,  a  great  many  times  when  no- 
body sees  them,  but  God  shall  wipe  away  all  tears  from 
their  eyes,"  when  they  reach  that  blessed  country.  There'll 
be  no  sorrow  there,  nor  death.  Do  you  know  what 
death  is  ?  How  many  of  you  have  ever  seen  any  one  dead? 
O !  yes,  there's  hardly  a  home  in  all  the  land  where  some 
dear  one  has  not  laid  white  and  still  in  a  coffin.  But  up 
in  Heaven  there'll  be  nothing  of  that  kind.  Nobody  will 
ever  say,  "  I  am  sick,"  there,  and  nobody  will  ever  die.  God 
will  give  to  all  Eternal  Life.  Heaven  is  a  happy  place — 
let  us  write  that  word  on  the  board — and  the  people  who 
live  in  it  are  happy  people. 

Now  can  we  remember  all  the  things  we  have  learned 
about  Heaven  ?  Let  us  recite  them  all  together.  What 
kind  of  a  place  is  Heaven  ?  "  Good,"  "  Beautiful,"  "  Large/' 
"Safe,"  "Light,"  "Happy." 

And  now  I  will  ask  the  next  question:  Who  are  in 
Heaven  ? 

Yes,  God,  our  dear  Heavenly  Father.  I  am  so  glad 
Jamie  thought  of  Him,  the  first  thing.  And  Jesus  our 
Saviour,  let  us  put  that  precious  name  down  next.  Can 
you  think  of  anyone  else  in  Heaven?  Angels,  Bessie 
says.  Yes,  John  says,  in  the  Bible,  that  one  of  the  times 
when  God  was  letting  him  look  into  Heaven,  he  saw  and 


HE  A  VEN. 


43 


heard  a  great  many  angels — "ten  thousand  times  ten  thou- 
sand." They  were  singing  a  song  of  praise  to  our 
Saviour.  Wouldn't  you  like  to  hear  them  too,  as  John 
did?  We  shall  hear  them,  and  sing  with  them  too,  when 
we  get  there.  But  can  you  think  of  anyone  else  who  is 
in  Heaven?  Yes  all  our  dear  friends  who  loved  Jesus 
when  they  were  living  on  this  earth,  and  have  died  and 
gone  from  us.  I  suppose  nearly  every  boy  and  girl  here 
has  some  dear  friend  in  that  beautiful  City.  I  have  my 
dear  Grandma,  and  Oh!  so  many  other  friends.  Johnnie 
is  raising  his  hand — he  has  somebody  over  there,  and  so 
has  Minnie,  and  Harry, — and  almost  all  of  you.  Do  you 
know  what  they  are  called — our  dear  friends  in  Heaven? 
"Angels  ?"  Yes,  sometimes  children  call  them  angels,  but 
there  is  another  name,  a  beautiful  name.  I  will  print  it 
here,  Saints-  That  means  Holy  ones.  What  is  it  to  be 
holy,  can  you  tell?  "To  be  free  from  sin."  Edith  has 
told  it  just  right.  We  must  have  our  sins  all  washed 
away  or  we  can  never  enter  the  beautiful  city.'  Do  you 
suppose  there  are  any  children  among  the  Saints  in 
Heaven  ?  O  yes,  a  great  many.  Children  from  this  land 
— some  of  the  dear  little  ones  that  we  know — and  little 
heathen  children  too,  thousands  and  thousands  of  them, 
going  up  from  their  sad  and  miserable  homes  right  into 
the  homes  of  Heaven.  Isn't  it  a  glorious  change  for 
them  ?  There's  a  verse  in  the  Bible  that  gives  us  a  little 
hint  about  the  children  in  Heaven,  You  may  all  rise  (for 
I'm  afraid  you're  getting  tired )  and  repeat  it  after  me. 

''And  the  streets  of  the  city  shall  be  full  of  boys  and 
^ir Is,  playing  in  the  streets  thereof    -Zech.  8:5. 

Now  we  are  ready  for  our  next  question.  What  can 
never  enter  heaven  ? 


44 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


Just  one  little  word  for  an  answer — one  word  with 
three  letters,  very  small  but  very  dreadful — Sin-  That 
is  the  one  thing  that  can  never  enter  the  city.  The  pearly 
gates  are  always  wide  open,  you  remember,  but  there's  a 
strong  angel  stands  by  each,  perhaps  for  this  very  reason 
— to  see  that  nothing  that  has  any  sin  about  it  gets  in- 
side. Are  you  not  glad  to  know  this?  What  has 
brought  all  the  sorrow  and  tears  and  pain  and  death  to 
this  world,  can  you  tell  ?  Do  you  suppose  Adam  and 
Eve  ever  cried  before  they  sinned  ?  Ah!  no  doubt  they 
cried  enough  afterward.  Yes,  sin  is  the  terrible  thing  that 
has  made  all  our  trouble.  It  has  almost  spoiled  this 
world,  and  it  would  spoil  heaven  if  it  should  once  get  in> 
past  the  sentinel  angel  at  the  gate;  but  it  never  will — 
we  need  not  fear. 

But  now,  children,  suppose  sin  was  all  covered  up  in  a 
child's  heart  ?  Just  one  little  sin,  away  down  in  the 
bottom  of  his  heart?  Would  that  one  little  sin  keep  the 
child  out  of  Heaven  ? 

But  we  have  all  had  sin  in  our  hearts,  haven't  we?  Is 
there  any  one  here — think  carefully,  now — who  can  say, 
"  I  have  never  done  wrong?  never  had  sin  in  my  heart"? 
Not  one!  Is  there  no  chance  for  us,  then,  to  go  to 
Heaven  ?  What  must  we  do?  Johnnie  says;  "  Be  good," 
but  suppose  after  I  get  the  first  dark  blot  of  sin  on  my 
heart,  I  am  good,  all  the  rest  of  my  life.  Will  that  take 
away  the  first  sin  ?  None  of  you  answer.  Do  you  see 
this  white  sheet  of  paper,  with  this  one  black  ink-spot  in 
the  corner?  Suppose  I  should  put  it  away  in  my  desk 
and  keep  the  rest  of  it  all  clean  and  white  as  long  as  I 
live — would  that  take  off  this  black  spot  ?   No,  of  course 


HE  A  VEN. 


45 


not.  Neither  will  all  our  being  good*'  take  a  single  blot 
of*  sin  out  of  our  hearts.  There's  no  hope  for  us — no 
hope  of  getting  into  Heaven,  that  way.  But  Mary  has 
her  hand  raised — what  is  it,  Mary  ?  "  We  must  ask  Jesus 
to  forgive  us  our  sins  !"  O  yes  !  This  is  the  way  to  be 
made  fit  for  Heaven — to  ask  Jesus  to  take  our  sins  all 
away — to  wash  our  hearts  clean  and  white.  But  will  He 
do  it  just  for  our  asking?  Let  us  see  what  the  Bible  says 
about  it. 

^^If  we  confess  our  sins^  He  is  faithful  and just  to  for- 
give us  our  sins  and  to  cleanse  us  from  all  unrighteous- 
nessT  I  John  1:9. 

And  now  comes  my  next  question.  I  have  asked  you 
all  to  answer  the  other  questions  aloud  to  me,  but  I  want 
you  to  whisper  the  answer  to  this  one,  softly,  to  the  dear 
Lord  Jesus,  who  is  right  here  with  us,  standing  by  the  side 

of  every  one  of  you:  Are  you  going  to  Heaven  ? 

Not,  are  you  going  to  start  by  and  by,  but  are  you  really 
on  your  way  now?  Have  your  sins  been  taken  away? 
Are  you  little  Christian  children  ?  Have  your  hearts  been 
washed  clean?  Are  you  trying  to  "  be  good"  and  please 
Him  every  day?  Do  you  see  the  little  line  Liave  left 
in  the  question  ?  I  left  it  so  that  you  might  put  in  there, 
each  one  of  you,  your  own  name.  I  don't  know  your 
names,  but  Jesus  does,  and  you  know  it  is  really  Jesus 
v/ho  is  asking  you  the  question.  Are  you  going  to 
Heaven  ?  You  are  going,  or  you  are  not.  You  must  say 
either  yes  or  no.  Whisper  the  answer  to  Jesus  now, 
while  we  wait  a  few  minutes  before  Him.  O,  I  am 
afraid  there  may  be  somebody  here  who  will  have  to 
answer,  "  No !" 


46 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


And  now  comes  our  last  question :  What  is  the 
best  time  to  start  for  Heaven?  "When  we're 
little ! "  Frank  says.  Yes,  indeed.  It's  a  great  deal 
easier  to  come  to  Jesus  '^when  we're  little"  than  at  any 
other  time.  And  it's  a  great  deal  safer,  too,  for  we  may 
not  all  live  to  grow  up.  But  there's  another  answer  to 
the  question,  that  I  want  you  to  think  of.  You  won't 
be  much  larger  to-morrow,  but  will  it  do  to  wait  till  to- 
morrow before  you  start  for  Heaven  ?  What  is  the  very 
best  time?  Now.  O,  yes.  That's  what  I  wanted  you 
to  say,  "  Now  "  is  the  best  time — this  very  hour.  If 
there  is  any  boy  or  girl  here  who  is  not  a  Christian — who 
is  not  going  to  Heaven — who  had  to  answer,  "No"  to 
that  question,  I  hope  that  one  will  start  now.  Jesus  is 
here.  He  is  waiting  to  forgive  you  and  to  make  you  all 
His  own  children.  Now,  we  are  going  to  pray — to  thank 
God  for  having  prepared  for  us  the  Beautiful  City;  and 
if  there's  any  one  here  who  wants  to  start  in  the  way  to 
Heaven  this  very  hour,  we  will  pray  for  that  one,  too, 
that  our  dear  Lord  may  wash  away  all  his  sins,  and  put 
his  feet,  even  while  we  are  praying,  into  the  way  that 
leads  to  the  Blessed  City  of  our  God. 


OUTLINES  ON  THE  LORD'S  PRAYER. 


47 


CHAPTER  VI. 

OUTLINES  ON  THE  LORD'S  PRAYER.* 

''OUR  FATHER." 

I.   What  a  good  father  does  for  his  children. 
Feeds. — John  6:  32. 
Clothes. — Is.  61 :  10. 
Sympathizes  with. — Ps.  103:  13. 
Corrects. —  Heb.  12:  6. 
Loves. — I  John  3:1. 
Gives  gifts. — Jas.  i  :  17,    John  3:  16. 
♦        2,   What  children  should  give  to  their  fathers. 
Love. — Matt.  22  :  37. 
Obedience. — I  John  5  :  3. 
Service. — Luke  2:  49.    Matt.  21  :  28. 
Honor.^Ps.  71:  8.    Matt.  5:  16. 

3.  What  our  Heavenly  Father  promises  to  His  children 

Gal  4:  7.    John  14:  2,  3.    Rom.  8:  32. 

4.  Who  are  God's  children  ? 

John  I  :  12.    Gal.  3  :  26. 

5.  What  are  all  the  rest  ?— Matt,  13  :  38. 

6.  Will  you  let  God  make  you  His  child  ? 


See  note,  page  56. 


48 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


WHO  ART  IN  HEAVEN; 


1 


J  L 


THE  CITY  OF  G 

Revelation,  21st  Chapter, 


OD. 


What  khid  of  a  place  P 


Tears,  (v.  4) 
Sorrow, 
Pain, 


Great,  Heavenly.  (v.io,i6) 

Holy,  Beautiful,  (v.  2)  ,  Q^^^h 

Safe,  Rich,  Bright.  (v.l2,l8)  Hunger,(ch.7:16) 

Light,  Glorious,  (v.  23^  Thirst, 

Easy  to  Enter,  (v.  13,26)  [  N i ght,  gi.  22 -.5) 

Who  will  be  there  P 

GOD,  JESUS,   NATIONS,  KINGS, 
REDEEMED  SINNERS, 

LITTLE  CHILDREN, 

A  GREAT  MULTITUDE. 

How  can  we  get  there  ? 

Ask  Jesus  to  take  our  sins  away.  Rev,  7 : 14 


SHALL  I  BE  THERE? 

1 1 — 1 1 — 


1  I — ' 


Note.  First  draw  the  lines  and  write  the  words  *'Thc  City  of  God."  Tliis 
guide  book  (liolding  up  a  Bible)  tells  four  things  about  the  City.  1.  What  kind 
of  a  place  it  is.  2.  Some  things  not  found  there.  3.  Who  will  be  there.  4.  How 
to  get  there.  Write  First  question,  read  verses  mentioned,  and  write  the  words 
Great,  Holy,  etc.  Write  word  NO,  read  verses  indicated,  and  write  Tears,  Pain, 
etc.  Write  Second  question,  read  verses  3,  22,24,  Ch.  7:9;  Mark  10:  14,  and  write 
the  words  God,  Jesus,  etc.  Write  Third  question,  read  7:  14,  and  write  Ask  Jesus, 
etc.  Last  of  all  write,  *' Shall  I  be  there?"  and  tell  each  one  to  ask  themselves  the 
question. —  W,  B.  Jacobs. 


OUTLINES  ON  THE  LORD'S  PRAYER,  49 


"HALLOWED  BE  THY  NAME." 

1.  What  are  His  names  P"^ 

Jehovah.    (Too  holy  to  be  spoken.)— Ex.  6 :  3 
Father  of  Lights. — James  i  :  17. 
God  of  Heaven. — Neh.»  i  :  5. 
God  of  Hosts. — Ps.  80:  7. 
Holy  One. — Hab.  i  :  12. 
I  AM, — Ex.  3  :  14. 
Living  God. — Heb.  10:  31. 
Mighty  God.— Jer.  32  :  18. 
Most  High  God.— Ps.  57:  2. 
King  of  Kings  and  Lord  of  Lords. — I  Tim. 
6:  IS. 

2.  Meaning  of"  Hallow."    (See  Webster's  Dictionary.) 

3.  How  may  we  help  to  answer  this  prayer  ? 

By  not  taking  His  name  in  vain. 

By  keeping  His  day  holy.     (Illustrate  by  the 

honor  we  pay  to  Washington,  in  celebrating 

his  birthday.) 
By  obeying  His  commandments,  especially  the 

one  in  I  John  3  :  23. 


"THY  KINGDOM  COME." 

I.   What  is  His  Kingdom? 

God  reigning  as  King  in  the  hearts  of  the  people. 
Illustration,    As  honey  is  in  the  honey-comb, 


*  The  teacher  might  allow  the  children  to  find  these  or  other  names, 
possibly  by  assigning  texts  during  the  meeting  ;  or,  better,  at  home,  before 
the  meeting. 


50 


CHILDREN  S  MEETINGS. 


by  being  in  each  particular  cell,  so  Gods  King- 
dom comes  by  His  coming  to  reign  in  each 
of  our  hearts. 

2.  How  does  God's  Kingdom  come  into  our  hearts? 

Not  breaking  in  as  a  thief,  but  entering  as  a  guest, 
when  we  are  willing. 

3.  What  are  the  duties  of  one  who  has  taken  God  for 

his  King?  ^ 

4.  How  may  we  help  on  the  coming  of  Christ's  King- 

dom to  the  dark  places  of  the  earth  ^' 
(Teacher  describe  condition  of  heathen  lands.) 

By  praying  for  them. 

By  giving  money  and  other  gifts. 

By  going  ourselves,  perhaps,  to  tell  them  of  Jesus, 
when  we  are  older. 

5.  The  Kingdom  will  fully  come  at  Christ's  Appearing. — 

Matt.  25:  31-46.    Phil.  2:  10. 

6.  Take  God  for  your  King  now,  that  you  may  be  on 

His  right  hand  then. — Matt.  25  :  34. 


"  THY  WILL  BE  DONE  IN  EARTH  AS  IT  IS  IN  HEAVEN.' 

1.  How  is  it  done  in  Heaven? 

Promptly,  gladly,  w^ithout  asking  questions,  etc.f 

2.  If  we  pray, Thy  will  be  done,"  we  ought  to  do  all  we 

can  to  see  that  it  is  done. 

3.  What  is  His  will? 

{a)   That  all  should  come  to  repentance. — H  Pet. 


*  Let  children  give  answers. 

"j*  Let  the  children  give  these  answ^ers,  and  others, 


OUTLINES  ON  THE  LORD'S  PRAYER,  51 


3:  9.    (Are  we  doing  all  we  can  to  brin^  the 

whole  world  to  repentance?) 
{b^  That  we  should  pray  always,  and  give  thanks 

for  everything. — I  Thes.  5:    17,  18.     (Are  we 

showing  our  thankfulness  by  our  work  for  Jesus?) 
(<;.)   That  we  should  live  pure  lives. — I  Pet.  i  :  15. 

(Revised  Version.)    (People  will  notice  our  actions 

more  than  our  words.) 

4.  A  promise  to  those  who  do  His  will. — I  John  2  :  17. 

(Until  converted,  we  have  not  begun  to  do  God's 
will.) 

5.  How  God  will  make  us  able  to  do  His  will. — Ezek. 

11:  19,  20. 


"GIVE  US  THIS  DAY  OUR  DAILY  BREAD." 

1.  Bread  is  the  staff  of  life.    Not  cake  nor  candy. 

2.  Bread  is  the  gift  of  God. 

Let  children  trace  back  a  loaf  of  bread  through 
various  stages  of  preparation  and  growth.  Bread 
—  flour  —  wheat-kernels — growing  grain  — seed, 
with  the  life-germ  put  in  it  by  God  s  hand, 
planted  in  God  s  earth,  nourished  by  His  sun- 
shine and  rain. 

3.  The  fitness  of  asking. 

Suppose  God  withheld  His  part  a  single  month? 
Only  one  summer-blessing  of  God  stands 
between  the  world  and  starvation. 

4.  How  God  answers  the  prayer. 

Every  year  the  world  is  fed  direct  from  God's 
resources. — Ps.  104:  27,28. 


52 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


5.    Christ,  the  Bread  of  Life. — John  6:  33.    And  God 
gives  us  freely  this  true  Bread. — John  6:  32. 


"  FORGIVE  US  OUR  DEBTS  AS  WE  FORGIVE  OUR  DEBTORS.*' 

2.  Praying  this  prayer,  without  forgiving  others  freely 

and  fully,  is  asking  God  not  to  forgive  us  freely 
and  fully.  (Tell  story  of  the  man  who  felt  hard 
toward  one  who  had  wronged  him,  and  could 
not  get  through  the  Lord's  Prayer.) 

3.  God  will  not  forgive  the  unforgiving. — Matt.  18:  23,35. 


4.   What  are  our  debts  to  God,  which  need  forgiveness  ? 
Unbelief,  selfishness,  anger,  etc.    (Let  children  give 


5.  How  is  it  possible  for  God  to  forgive  sinners,  without 

breaking  His  word,  (Ezek.  18:  4,)  "The  soul  that 
sinneth,  it  shall  die"?    See  I  Pet.  3:  18. 

6.  Have  we  any  right  to  ask  forgiveness  "for  Jesus' 

sake,"  until  we  have  taken  Him  for  our  Savior.^ 


"LEAD    us   NOT   INTO   TEMPTATION,  BUT  DELIVER  US 


I.   What  was  the  first  Temptation  ? 

Who  led  into  that  temptation? — Gen.  3:  1,6. 
What  were  its  results 


The  Debtor 


Was  forgiven 
$14,400,000. 


other  answers.) 


FROM  EVIL. 


Upon  Adam  and  Eve? 
Upon  the  whole  world  ? 


OUTLINES  ON  THE  i^OkjJ'S  PRAYER. 


53 


2.  Other  Bible  examples  of  temptation,  with  results. 

Job. — Job  2  :  7,  lO. 

Daniel. — Dan.  6:  7-28. 

Pilate. — John  19:  5-16. 

Christ. — Matt.  4:  i-ii.    Heb.  4:  15. 

3.  The  difference  between  being  led  into  temptation, 

and  walking  into  it.  Bad  company,  neglect  of 
prayer,  etc. 

4.  "  But   deliver   us  from  the   Evil  One.''  (Revised 

Version.) 

What  is  the  Evil  One  like.?— I  Pet.  5  :  8. 

Does  he  always  seem  to  us  like  an  open  enemy  ? 

— II  Cor.  II:  14. 

5.  Is  God  able  to  deliver? — Hebo  2:   18.    Rev.  20:2. 

6.  Is  He  willing  to  deliver? — Dan.  3:  17.    II  Pet.  3:  9. 


"FOR  THINE  IS  THE  KINGDOM,  AND  THE  POWER,  AND 
THE  GLORY,  FOREVER." 

Why? 

Why  should  His  name  be  hallowed? 

Why  should  His  Kingdom  come? 

Why  should  His  will  be  done? 

Why  should  we  pray  to  Him  for  daily  bread  ? 

Why  should  we  pray  to  Him  for  forgiveness  of  sin  ? 

Why  should  we  pray  to  Him  for  deliverance  from 
evil? 
Three  Reasons. 
I.    "  Thine  is  the  kingdom." 

Where  is  His  throne? — Ps.  11:4. 

What  is  His  foot-stool? — Is.  66:  i. 


54 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


What  is  His  sceptre? — Heb.  i  :  8. 
Illustration,  Esther  5  :  2. 
Who  are  His  attendants? — Ps.  103  :  20. 
Over  whom  does  He  rule? — Ps.  103:  19.  PhiL 
2  :  10,  1 1. 

2.  "  And  the  power." 

How  much  power  has  He?— Rom.  13  :  i. 

How  is  His  power  shown  ?  (Let  children  answer.) 

In  the  creation  of  the  world. 

In  His  care  over  His  creatures. 

In  the  destruction  of  His  enemies. 

In  the  salvation  of  all  that  trust  Him. 

3.  "  And  the  glory." 

Who  are  to  give  glory  to  God? — Ps.  148:  1-12. 
Notice  that  children  are  given  a  very  promi- 
nent place  in  the  list. 

All  we  do  should  be  for  God's  glory, — I  Cor.  10:  31. 
No  chance  left  for  glorifying  ourselves. 
Who  will  finally  give  God  glory? — Rev.  5  :  13. 
"  Forever!' 

His  kingdom,  His  power,  and  His  glory  will  endure 
forever. — Dan.  4:  3.    Rev.  7:  12. 

''From  everlasting  to  everlasting,  thou  art  God!' 


"  AMEN."  ^ 

Let  all  the  people  say  Amen." — Ps.  106:  48. 

I.    Meaning  of  ''Amen':  "  So  may  it  be;"  used  in 


*  This  lesson  may  well  be  divided  into  two  or  three,  or  even  more 
lessons  ;  as,  treated  in  this  way,  it  is  very  comprehensive. 


OUTLINES  ON  THE  LORD'S  PRAYER,  55 


prayer  and  worship.  Among  the  Jews,  it  was  used  in  the 
Temple  sej'vice.  The  people  would  remain  in  the  Court 
of  the  Israelites,  while  the  priests  offered  the  sacrifices 
in  the  Temple.  Then  the  Levites  would  sing  a  psalm, 
and  at  every  pause  in  the  music,  the  trumpets  would 
sound,  and  the  people  would  bow  and  worship,  saying, 
Amen  !"— "  So  may  it  be  ! " " 

II.  Let  us  select  some  prayers  from  the  Bible,  and 
see  if  we  can  say  "  Amen  '*  to  them. 

1.  For  Salvation, 

Lord,  save  me.— Matt.  14:  30, 

God  be  merciful  to  me,  a  sinner. — Luke  18:  13. 

Create  in  me  a  clean  heart,  O  Lord. — Ps.  51 :  lO, 

2.  For  work  to  do  for  Clirist, 

Lord,  what  wilt  Thou  have  rne  to  do  ? — Acts,  9 :  6. 

3.  For  right  thoughts,  words,  and  actions. 

Set  a  watch,  O  Lord,  before  my  mouth ;  keep  the 
door  of  my  lips. — Ps.  141  :  3. 

Let  the  words  of  my  mouth,  and  the  meditation 
of  my  heart,  be  acceptable  in  Thy  sight,  O  Lord, 
my  strength  and  my  Redeemer. — Ps.  19:  14. 

4.  For  the  conversion  of  friends. 

My  heart's  desire  and  prayer  for  Israel  is,  that  they 
might  be  saved, — Rom.  10 :  i. 

5.  For  enemies. 

Father,  forgive  them,  for  they  know  not  what  they 
do. — Luke  23  :  34. 
5.    That  Gods  will  may  be  done  in  everything. 


=^  It  would  be  well  to  sketch  the  plan  of  the  Temple,  and  show  the 
position  of  the  worshipers  during  Temple  service. 


56 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


7.    For  Chris  fs  second  coming. 

Even  so,  come,  Lord  Jesus  - — Rev.  22:  20. 
(Are  you  ready,  if  He  should  come  now  ?) 
III.    If  we  say    Amen"  to  these  prayers,  we  shall 
do  all  we  can  to  answer  them  ourselves. 

Note.— The  references  in  these  and  all  the  lessons  are  mainly  for  the  Lead- 
er's help,  suggesting  how  each  topic  may  be  treated.  But  where  the  children 
are  old  enough  to  find  references  readily,  they  may  read  or  repeat  them,  when- 
ever it  can  be  done  without  delay  or  formality.  In  a  well  organized  meeting,  the 
verses  may  often  be  assigned  beforehand,  for  memorizing  or  special  study. 
Children  cannot  too  early  be  taught  to  use  the  "Sword  of  the  Spirit,  which  is  the 
Word  of  God.'» 


OUTLINES. 


m 


CHAPTER  VII. 

OUTLINES. 
The  Little  King. 
I. 

The  Birth  of  an  Earthly  Prince. 

Describe  the  ceremonies  at  the  birth  of  a  crown 
prince."  Desire  of  the  king  for  a  successor.  Anxiety  of 
the  subjects.  Birth  announced.  Bells  ring;  illumina- 
tions, etc.  Nobles  gathering  to  the  palace.  Little  baby 
brought  out  to  them.  His  robes,  jewels,  etc.  (A  little 
acting  would  not  be  out  of  place  at  this  point.  Hold 
out  your  arms,  as  if  the  baby  rested  on  them,  and  ask  the 
children  to  look  at  him — to  notice  his  dress,  pearls,  and 
other  such  things.)  Their  confessions  of  allegiance;  how 
they  bow  the  knee.  Soldiers  to  fight  fo/  him;  subjects 
to  love  him. 

II. 

The  Birth  of  the  ^'Prince  of  Peace'' 

Bethlehem.  The  Mother  and  Child.  Contrast.  Make 
constant  reference  to  the  first  division,  through  the 
second.  Very  few  knew  that  he  was  a  king.  Stable; 
manger;  shepherds;  wise  men;  star.  He  needs  soldiers, 
subjects.    All  shall  come  to  His  feet  some  day.  "Every 


58 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


knee  shall  bow."  Who  will  now  acknowledge  Him  ? 
What  His  kingdom  is  "  within  us."  How  He  won  His 
kingdom — died  for  us."  How  we  may  become  His  sub- 
jects. "My  son,  give  me  thine  heart."  "Will  you 
crucify  your  king?"  Baby  kings  often  put  to  death. 
(Athaliah.  H  Kings  ii:  i.  King  Richard  HI.)  He 
must  have  either  a  throne  or  a  cross  in  your  heart. 
Which}— Rev.  David  R.  Breed, 


Finding. 

1.  What  may  we  find? 

Christ,    Those  that  seek  me  early  shall  find 

me. — Prov.  8  :  17. 
Life.     Whoso  findetii  me  findeth  life.— Prov. 

8:35. 

Rest,     Ye  shall  find  rest  unto  your  souls. — 

Matt,  ii:  29. 
Grace.    Find  grace  to  help  in  time  of  need.—  Heb. 

4:  16. 

2.  Whom  should  we  find  next  ? 

Unconverted  friends,    He  first  findeth  his  own* 
brother. — John^  i  :  41. 

3.  Result  of  neglecting  to  find  Christ. 

Failure.    Ye  shall  seek  me,  and  shall  not  find  me. 

—John  7:  34- 
Disgrace  and  death.    Be  sure  your  sin  will  find 

you  out. — Num.32:  23. 


OUTLINES, 


59 


Envy. 

(Draw  picture  of  a  poisonous  plant  on  black-board. 
Name  it  "  Envy."    Outline  a  heart  around  the  plant. 
Make  shoots,  extending  from  the  plant  outside  the  heart, 
into  the  outward  life.) 
What  is  Envy? 
How  is  it  like  a  poison-plant? 

Who  puts  the  seed  of  this  poison-plant  into  the 
heart  ? 

It  fills  the  heart,  leaving  no  room  for  the  love  of  God. 

It  sends  branches  out  into  our  lives. 

What  branches  grow  from  the  plant,  "  Envy,"  in  a 
child's  heart  ?^ 

Can  we  kill  the  plant  by  cutting  off  the  branches  ? 

Let  us  have  silent  prayer,  that  God  will  root  out  this 
plant  from  our  hearts. — Adapted  from  Pansy!' 


The  Christian  Farmer. 

The  farm  is — 

The  zvorld.    Matt.  13:  38.    Mark  16:  15. 
The  work  is  to — 

1.  Get  the  soil  ready. — Prov.  16:  i.   John  16:  8,  9. 

2.  Sow, 

Who  is  to  sow  ?    The  Farmer,  and  all  his  "  hired 
help,"  (the  missionaries).    Acts  8  :  4. 
What?    Good  seed.    Matt.  13:  27  1.  c.  Precious 
seed. — Ps.  126  :  6. 


*  Answers  may  be  given  by  the  children,  and  written  on  the  branches 
of  the  plant  represented  on  the  board. 


60 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


When  ?  Morning  and  evening. — Eccl.  1 1  :  6. 
To-day.— Matt.  21':  28. 

How?  Beside  all  waters. — Is.  32:  20.  Bounti- 
fully.— II  Cor.  9:  6.    With  tears.    Ps.  126:  5,6. 

3.  Cultivate. — I  Cor,  3  :  6. 

4.  Reap. — Ps.  126:  6.    Is.  55:  10,  11. 
The  Reward. 

Dan.  12:3.    II  Tim.  4:  8.— y.  C.  C. 


The  Hand  of  Faith. 

Note  to  Leader:  Draw  the  hand  upon  the  black-board,  using  the  hand  of 
one  of  the  children  as  a  model. 

Impress  the  fact  that  for  every  act  of  ours  mentioned  here,  God  has  promised 
to  do  some  corresponding  thing. 

2.  Ask. 

3.  Incline 

4.  Take. 

5.  Hold. 

I.  We  must  find  our  Savior.  But  He  is  seeking  us. 
It  takes  only  a  little  while  for  a  Seeking  Savior  and  a 
seeking  sinner  to  find  each  other. 

II.  Then  ask  Him  to  save  you.  But  He  has  already 
asked  you  to  let  Him  save  you.  (Quote  some  of  the 
Gospel  invitations.) 

III.  You  must  incline  your  hearts  to  His  com- 
mands.    Illustrate   by  the   anxious   listener,  bending 


OUTLINES. 


61 


toward  the  speaker.  But  the  Savior  inclines  His  ear  to 
hear  our  call. 

IV,  Then  take  His  hand.  But  the  Saviors  hand  is 
already  reached  out  to  take  yours.  Illustrate  by  the  dif- 
ference between  throwing  a  rope  to  a  drowning  person, 
and  reaching  a  hand  to  him.  The  rope  cannot  grasp:  it 
can  only  be  grasped. 

V.  Finally,  hold  on  to  the  Savior's  hand,  as  though 
it  all  depended  on  you,  but  know  that  the  Savior  will 
keep  His  hold  upon  you.  The  child  on  a  slippery  walk, 
although  its  father  holds  it  safely  by  the  hand,  yet  clings 
with  all  its  little  might  to  its  father  s  hand.  Contrast  the 
policeman's  hold  on  the  little  thief.  The  hold  is  all  on 
one  side. — A.  Carman. 


The  Book  of  Life. 

Speak  of  different  kinds  of  books.  How,  and  of  what, 
made.  Whal  for?  Get  out  of  date — torn — lost — for- 
gotten. 

God's  book;  Book  of  Life;  Book  of  Remembrance, 
will  always  be  preserved. 

1.  If  we  love  and  serve  Him  our  names  are  written  in 
it.  If  we  fear  even  to  displease  him — if  we  love  to  think 
of,  talk  about  Him — He  writes  our  names  in  His  book. — 
Mai.  3 :  i6. 

2.  If  our  names  are  in  God's  book,  He  thinks  about  us, 
talks  about  us  to  the  angels,  and  tells  them  to  watch 
over  and  look  after  us. — Ps.  91  :  11. 


62 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


3.  Those  whose  names  are  not  written  in  God's  book 
will  never  see  Him. — Rev.  20:  15,  and  Rev.  21  :  27. 

4.  You  can  know  whether  your  name  is  written 
there,  or  not. — John  14:  15,  and  Is.  63  :  8. 

5.  Moses  and  Paul  talked  about  this  book. — Ex. 
32:  32,  and  Phil.  4:  3. 

6.  Is  your  name  in  God's  book — are  your  friends* 
names  there?  Ask  them;  and  ask  God  that  none  may 
ever  be  blotted  out. — Rev.  3  :  5. — Mrs,  V,  J.  Kent. 


Finding  Rest. 

Strange  directions  for  finding  rest. 
Stand, — 

Walk.    Jer.  6:16. 
Run, — 

Become  a  servant.    Is.  40:  31. 
Wear  a  yoke, — 
Bear  burdens, — 

Learn  lessons.    Matt.  11  :  28-30. 
Suffer.    II  Cor.  12:  7-10. 

Why  it  is  that  we  find  rest  in  doing  these 

THINGS. 

God  is  with  us.    Exodus  33:  14. 

We  are  laborers  together  with  Him.    I  Cor.  3 :  9. 

He  strengthens  us.    Is.  41  :  10. 

Supports  us.    Deut.  33:  27. 

We  may  cast  our  care  on  Him.    I  Peter  5  :  7. 


OUTLINES.  ' 


63 


Conversion. 

What  is  it  to  be  converted  ? 
To  love  Jesus. 
To  be  good. 
To  be  a  Christian, 
lo  have  our  sins  forgiven. 
To  be  made  a  child  of  God. 
To  come  to  Jesus. 

To  turn — be  turucd — toward  God.    lam,  5: 
21.    Joel  2  :  12. 
Who  has  something  to  do  that  a  child  may  be  con- 
verted ? 

The  child. 

God. 

What  must  the  child  do?"^"^ 

Repent  (  Be  sorry  for  his  sins. ) 
Decide  to  forsake  sin.  Turn. 
Pray  (  for  forgiveness.) 

Believe  ( what  God  has  said.  e.  g.  I  John,  i  :  9.; 
Be  good   (explain   the  proper  place  of  this 

answer. ) 
What  will  God  do  ? 

Give  the  Holy  Spirit  (to  help  in  all  the  child's 

efforts  to  turn.) 


*The  first  answers  are  the  ones  children  usually  give.  A  wise  Leader  will 
receive  whatever  honest  answers  the  children  give,  correcting,  explaining, 
enlarging,  and  turning  everything  to  the  best  possible  advantage.  Let  the  Leader 
add  to  the  last  answer,  the  root-meaning  of  the  word,  and  impress  the  thought. 

**The  answers  to  this  question  must  be  carefully  chosen  from  the  many  the 
children  may  give,  so  as  to  exclude  error,  and  present  the  steps  in  their  scriptural 
order. 


64 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


Forgive  (  take  away  our  sins. ) 
Adopt  ( make  him  a  child. ) 
Why  should  we  be  converted  ? 
God  commands  it. 
To  be  made  happy  on  earth. 
To  be  saved  in  Heaven. 

To  help  our  friends  to  Christ.    Acts  26:  18. 
What  is  the  best  time  to  be  converted  ? 
Childhood. 
Now* 

Have  you  been  converted  ? 


SERMONS  FOR  CHILDREN, 


CHAPTER  VIII. 
SERMONS  FOR  CHILDREN. 
The  Lpving  Invitation. 

Sing. —  "Jesus  loves  even  me." 

To  day  we  will  "have  church"  as  big  people  do.  I  wifi 
be  the  Minister,  and  you  will  act  as  nicely  as  if  you  were 
forty  or  fifty  years  old.  But  I  have  sometimes  seen  old 
people  fast  asleep  in  church,  and  as  I  want  you  to  keep 
awake,  I  will  ask  you  to  help  me  preach  the  sermon. 

How  many  will  promise  to  help  me  all  they  can? 
(Hands)  WelJ  there  are  four  things  you  can  do  to  help 
me,  and  I  will  write  them  on  the  blackboard  so  you 
will  not  forget  them. 

1 .  Listen.  (When  I  speak.) 

2.  Look.     (When  I  write.) 

3.  Speak.  (When  I  ask  you  to.) 

4.  Remember.    (What  you  learn.) 

(Write  the  four  underscored  words  on  blackboard  '\ 
Now  tell  me  what  you  are  to  do.  (Have  children  repeat 
the  four  words  several  times.) 

What  do  you  listen  with?  (Ears.) 

What  do  you  look  with  ?  (Eyes,) 

What  do  you  speak  with?  (Tongue.) 

What  do  you  remember  with?  (Mind.) 

(Erase  all  from  the  board.) 


66 


CHILDREN'S  ME E  TINGS. 


What  does  the  minister  do  before  he  begins 
to  preach  ?  (Tells  what  his  text  is.)  Well  I  will  tell 
you  first  what  my  text  is.  (Put  on  the  blackboard  and 
have  it  repeated  several  times.) 

Text,  Matthew.,  chapter  1  1^  verse  28. 

My  text  has  only  three  words  in  it  but  they  are 
very  loving  words  from  a  very  loving  friend,  and  we 
will  learn  i.  What  he  says.  2.  Who  he  is.  3.  To 
ivhom  he  speaks.    4.    Why  he  speaks. 

The  first  word  is  one  of  the  sweetest  ever  spoken, 
and  I  am  sure  you  can   all  remember  it. 

(Write  on  the  blackboard  the  words,  so  as  gradu- 
ally to  work  out  diagram  as  at  end  of  this  lesson. ) 
What  He  says?  Come. 

(Illustrate  how  much  more  willing  we  are  to  do  any- 
thing if  some  one  helps  or  goes  with  us,  A  child  who 
does  not  like  to  go  when  sent  alone,  is  glad  to  go  if 
the  parent  says,  *'  Come."  Many  eloquent  speakers  urged 
others  to  go  to  the  war  without  success,  but  the  men 
who  refused  to  go  then  were  willing  to  go  when  some 
friend  said,  "  Come,  let  us  enter  the  army.")  But  be- 
fore we  accept  any  invitation  we  w^ant  to  know 
where  we  are  invited,  and  so  I  must  put  the  rest  of  my 
text  on  the  board.  (Write.)  Where?  Unto  mQ. 
(See  diagram.)  But  so  many  voices  call,  Come  with 
me, and  so  many  who  would  lead  us  astray  invite  us  to 
go  with  them,  that  we  want  to  know  who  it  is  that 
calls.  (Let  the  children  say  whose  words  these  are,  and 
then  write.)  Who  calls?  Jesus-  And  if  Jesus  calls 
is  it  safe  to  follow  Him  ?  Yes ;  we  are  sure  He  will 
never  lead  us  wrong.    But  we  also  want  to  know,  to 


SERMOAS  FOR  CHILDREN, 


67 


whom  He  is  speaking.  If  I  made  a  great  party  for  the 
boys  and  girls  of  this  town,  you  would  all  be  glad,  but 
you  would  feel  very  badly  if  you  found  you  were  not  in- 
vited. (Write  on  the  board.)  Who  are  called  ?  (As 
the  children  answer,  write  on  blackboard — see  diagram:) 

Children.  Sinners.  "  Whosoever  will." 

Now  tell  me  why  we  should  come  to  Jesus  ?  (Write 
on  board :) 

Why  come?  He  can  forgive  my  sins.  He  can 
cleanse  my  heart. 

Yes :  we  need  Him.  No  other  can  take  our  sins 
away.    But  when  should  you  come?  (Write:) 

When  come?    To-day.  Now. 

It  is  not  safe  to  wait — it  is  not  best  to  wait.  We 
cannot  be  happy,  for  we  cannot  be  saved,  until  Jesus 
forgives  our  sins. 

How  many  want  Him  to  forgive  your  sins  to-day? 

Close  with  brief  prayer. 

Sing   Come  to  the  Savior." 

When  the  lesson  is  finished,  the  outline  on  blackboard 
will  be  as  follows ; 

Text :  Matthew,  chapter  1 1  :  verse  28. 

What?  Come. 

Where?  Unto  Me. 

Who  calls?  Jesus. 

]  Who  are  called?  Children,   Sinners,  "Who- 
/  soever  will." 

Why  come?         He  can  \  l^lf--^  ^  ^J-. 

When  come?        To-Day.  Now. 


68 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


The  Woman  who  was  bent  double. 

To  day  I  want  to  tell  you  a  Bible  story;  one  which 
you  may  never  have  heard  about.  Did  you  ever  hear 
any  Bible  story?  Yes.  (addressing  some  one  whose 
hand  has  been  raised)  What  was  it  about?  (Let  different 
children  tell  of  Bible  stories  they  have  heard  and  put 
names  mentioned  on  B.  B.  as  David,  Moses,  Daniel, 
etc)  But  this  story  is  not  about  any  of  these  persons, 
it  is  about  ''a  woman  who  was  bent  double."  Did' 
you  ever  hear  that  story?  Did  you  know  there  was 
such  a  story  in  the  Bible?  Well,  there  is  and  I  will 
read  it  to  you,  and  I  want  every  one  of  you  to  listen 
and  learn  all  you  can  about  her.   (Read  Luke  13:  10-17.) 

About  whom  is  this  lesson?   A  woman. 

What  did  she  have?    A  spirit  of  Infirmity, 

Do  you  know  what  that  means?  It  means  a  weak- 
ness. Could  that  hurt  her?  Many  people  have  such 
things  now,  and  they  don't  seem  troubled  about  it. 
Bad  habits,  such  as  drinking,  swearing,  etc.,  are 
sometimes  called  "weaknesses."  Do  you  think  they  do 
any  harm  ?  Yes,  they  do,  and  a  boy,  or  girl,  or  man, 
or  woman  is  very  foolish  who  thinks  that  such  weaknesses 
do  no  harm. 

Let  us  see  how  this  woman's  weakness  affected 
her.  How  long  had  she  had  it  ?  Eighteen  years. 
And  many  a  bad  habit  which  we  think  does  not  amount  to 
any  thing,,  lasts  even  longer  than  eighteen  years.  How  did 
it  affect  her?    She  was  bozved  together. 

Yes,  she  was  bent  double,  and  wherever  she  went 
people  would  notice  her  and  either  laugh  at    or  pity 


SERMONS  FOR  CHILDREN. 


69 


her.  But  why  didn't  she  straighten  up,  and  walk  like 
other  people?  She  was //^//'/^i'^.  Verse  ii,says:  She 
could  not  help  herself. 

Could  her  neighbors  help  her  ? 

No,  her  best  friends  could  do  nothing  for  her. 
But  tell  me  how  this  came  upon  her?  Satan  bound  her. 
Ah,  that  explains  it  all!  It  was  Satan's  work,  and  he 
was  stronger  than  the  woman  and  stronger  than  her 
friends.  And  that  is  the  trouble  with  our  weaknesses; 
our  bad  habits.  Who  teaches  boys  and  girls  to  steal 
and  swear  and  lie  and  drink  ?  Satan.  Yes,  whenever  you 
see  a  boy  with  bad  habits  you  can  say  ''Satan 
bound  him.'^  Does  Satan  like  to  harm  us?  Yes, 
God's  word  calls  him  our  adversary  or  enemy,  and 
says  he  seeks  to  devour  us.  (Read  i  Peter  5:8.) 
Whom  does  Satan  seek?  Every  one  of  us.  Yes  he 
wants  to  destroy  every  little  boy  and  girl  and  I  sup- 
pose many  who  are  here  to  day  are  under  Satan's  power. 
Can  your  friends  save  you?  Can  you  save  yourself? 
No,  we  cannot.  But  our  lesson  tells  us  of  one 
who  is  mightier  than  Satan.  Who  is  it?  Jesus. 
Yes,  Jesus  is  the  friend  we  need.  Now  tell  me 
what  is  said  about  Jesus?  He  saw  her.  Yes,  those 
loving  eyes  of  Jesus  saw  her  in  her  need,  and  they  see 
us  too  in  our  helplessness  and  sin.  How  did  He  feel? 
He  pitied  her.  Yes,  Jesus'  loving  heart  was  full  of  pity 
for  her,  and  it  is  for  us.  What  did  He  do/'  Called  her. 
And  his  voice  is  calling  us  to  day.  What  eJse  did  He 
do  ?  Touched  her.  Yes  those  loving  hands  were  always 
held  out  to  do  good.  They  touched  the  Leper;  they 
held  the  little  children;  they  were  nailed  to  the  cross; 


70 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


and  they  are  held  out  to  day  toward  us.  And  what 
else  did  He  do?  Healed  her.  How?  By  His  power. 
Andean  He  do  the  same  for  us?  Yes,  He  can.  The 
poor  woman  was,  and  I  may  be,  saved  by  Jesus.  And 
now  dear  children  let  me  read  what  the  Bible  says  about 
every  one  of  us.  (Read  Rom.  3:  23.)  All  are  bent 
down  by  sin,  some  for  a  few  years,  some  for  many  years, 
and  we  cannot  save  ourselves.  What  shall  we  do?  Let 
us  ask  Jesus,  who  sees  and  pities  and  loves  us,  to  heal 
and  save  us  this  day  by  His  mighty  power. —  W,  B. 
Jacobs. 

The  outhne  on  B.  B.  should  be  as  follows : 


A  WOMAN 

A  Spirit  of  Infirmity 
1 8  Years. 

Bowed  Together. 

Helpless. 


JESUS 

Saw  Her. 
Pitied  Her, 
Called  Her. 
Touched  Her. 
Healed  Her, 


BOUND  BY  SATAN.     SAVED  BY  JESUS. 


Death. 

Luke  C  1 52.  —  "  She  is  not  dead,  but  sleepeth. 

This  was  spoken  of  a  little  girl  twelve  years  old. 
Her  friends  all  supposed  she  was  dead.  They  were 
right;  she  was  soon  to  be  buried.  Jesus  came,  and, 
knowing  that  she  was  dead,  said,  in  the  words  of  your 
text,  "  She  is  not  dead,  but  sleepeth. "  What  did  He 
niean.    He  wanted  to  have  the  friends  know  that  He 


SERMONS  FOR  CHILDREN, 


71 


thought  that  they  had  a  wrong  idea  of  death,  and 
wrong  feelings  in  regard  to  it ;  and  in  the  sense  in 
which  they  spoke  and  thought  of  death,  the  Httle  girl 
was  not  dead. 

Now,  I  want  to  say  a  few  words  to  you  about  death, 
for  I  know  that  many  people  have  a  wrong  idea  about  it, 
and  I  am  quite  sure  that  Jesus  had  the  right  idea;  and 
so  long  as  it  is  true  that  half  of  the  graves  in  the  world 
are  children's  graves,  I  am  very  anxious  to  have  you  think 
and  feel  as  you  should  concerning  death. 

It  is  a  blessed  thing  to  go  to  sleep,  when  we  are 
tired  out  and  can  drop  to  sleep  in  an  instant.  Some- 
times we  wish  we  could  have  more  time  to  play,  but 
when  the  hour  of  sleep  comes  how  sweetly  it  takes  us 
in  its  arms,  and  nothing  is  more  beautiful  than  a  sleep- 
ing child.  And  it  was  only  a  few  days  ago  that  I  saw 
a  little  child  who  had  been  suffering  day  after  day  die, 
and  only  in  a  few  moments,  such  a  sweet  smile  came  up- 
on her  lips,  and  I  could  not  help  saying  "  How  sweetly 
she  sleeps." 

The  next  thing  for  you  to  remember  is,  that  those 
who  go  to  sleep,  wake  up.  When  you  have  been  to 
school  six  hours,  and  have  helped  mother  at  home,  and 
have  played  very  hard  all  the  spare  moments,  you 
begin  to  find  it  very  hard  to  hold  up  your  head,  and 
nothing  seems  bright  and  pleasant,  but  in  the  morning, 
when  the  sun  looks  in  at  the  window,  and  says,  "My 
little  man,  or  little  woman,  it  is  time  to  get  up,"  how 
bright  the  world  looks ;  how  strong  and  happy  you  feel ; 
how  very  different  from  the  way  in  which  you  felt  the 
night  before.    So  when  any  of  us  are  put  to  sleep  by 


72 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


Jesus,  we  can  know  that  there  is  a  morning  coming,  and 
when  that  has  come  we  shall  be  so  strong,  and  beautiful, 
and  happy,  that  the  night  of  our  sleep  will  seem  to  have 
been  very  short.  But  I  hear  some  little  child  say,  "1  do 
not  want  to  go  to  sleep  in  the  ground ;  I  do  not  want 
to  be  put  in  a  coffin ; "  and  you  need  not.  Once  in  a 
while  my  little  girl  says  "  Papa,  I  don't  want  to  go  to  bed 
up  stairs ;  "  she  does  not  want  to  be  alone,  so  her  mother 
allows  her  to  make  her  bed  upon  the  lounge  in  the  bright 
sitting-room.  At  length  she  falls  asleep;  then,  when  I 
am  through  with  my  studies,  I  carry  her  to  her  bed, 
and  she  knows  nothing  of  the  dark  night  nor  the  lonely 
room.  In  the  same  way  no  child  of  you  will  ever  know 
anything  about  the  grave  or  coffin,  if  you  have  to  be 
buried  in  them.  You  will  fall  asleep  at  home,  and  when 
you  wake,  if  you  are  Christ's,  you  awake  in  a  better 
home. 

But  another  thing:  we  all  grow  when  we  are 
asleep.  The  reason  why  some  children  do  not  grow 
more  is  because  they  do  not  have  sleep  enough.  A  few 
months  ago  a  farmer's  boy  put  a  kernel  of  corn  in  the 
ground;  you  could  pinch  it  between  your  little  fingers,  or 
hold  a  hundred  kernels  in  your  hand,  but  when  the  corn 
slept  it  grew,  and  to  day  it  has  become  a  tall  stalk,  with 
full  ears  and  long  rows  of  kernels.  So  if  a  little  child's 
body  is  taken  to  the  cemetery  and  left  sleeping,  it  will 
not  be  very  long,  as  God  counts  time,  before  it  will  come 
forth  in  heaven  a  most  beautiful  body,  worthy  to  live  in 
the  beautiful  land. 

And  once  again ;  do  you  not  sometimes  dream  when 
you  are  asleep  ?    What  does  this  mean  ?    That  your  mind 


SERMONS  FOR  CHILDREN. 


73 


IS  awake,  waiting  for  your  refreshed  body  in  the  morn- 
ing. So  when  you  put  the  body  to  sleep  in  the  grave, 
it  is  not  the  soul  sleeping — that  has  gone  to  be  with 
Jesus  whom  it  loved,  and  as  you  all  know  that  the 
soul  is  the  most  precious  thing  you  have,  you  should 
remember,  when  you  put  the  body  away,  it  is  like  lay- 
ing aside  the  rough  soil  that  holds  a  jewel  until  the 
Master  can  fashion  it  and  place  it  in  a  beautiful  casket. 
All  we  have  to  do  when  death  comes  is  to  say,  "  Now  I 
lay  me  down  to  sleep,  I  pray  Thee,  Lord,  my  soul  to 
keep.  ''—Rev,  J.  G.  Merrill. 


God  Thinking  About  Us. 

The  Lord  thinketh  upon  me.  — Psa.  40  ;  17. 

I  want  to  tell  you,  from  the  Bible,  some  wonderful 
things  about  God's  thoughts  of  us,  and  our  thoughts  of 
Him.  The  first  is  what  the  text  tells  us,  that  God 
thinks  of  us.  When  Nehemiah  was  building  the  wall  at 
Jerusalem,  and  bad  people  were  watching  for  a  chance  to 
kill  him,  he  prayed,  "  Think  upon  me  O  GodV  and  the 
Lord  did  think  upon  him,  and  watch  over  him,  so  that 
he  was  saved  from  all  harm.    (Neh.   5:  19.) 

At  another  time,  when  Jonah,  one  of  God's  ministers, 
was  out  on  the  sea,  and  a  great  storm  arose  that  threw 
the  waves  all  over  the  vessel,  he  prayed  to  God  for  all 
in  the  ship :  "  Think  upon  us,  that  we  perish  not ; "  and 
all  were  saved,    (Jon.  i  :  6.) 

It  will  be  a  beautiful  prayer  for  many  of  us  to  say  to- 
night.   "  Think  upon  me,  O  my  God. "    It  is  always 


74 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


pleasant  to  have  kind  friends  to  say  that  they  often  think 
of  us,  but  the  best  of  all,  is  to  read  from  the  Bible,  "  The 
Lord  thinketh  upon  me."  David  thought  it  was  very 
wonderful,  that  the  God  who  made  all  the  stars,  and 
takes  care  of  all  the  worlds,  should  ever  think  about 
him,  and  so  he  sang  with  his  beautiful  harp:  ''What  is 
man,  that  thou  art  mindful  of  him  and  the  Son  of  man 
that  thou   regardest  him ! "    (Ps.  8:4.) 

And  Job  thought  it  was  so  strange  that  God  should 
think  of  him,  that  he  said,  "  What  is  man  that  thou 
shouldest  set  thine  heart  upon  him!"    (Job  7:  17.) 

In  another  place  in  the  Bible,  God  says  to  us:  "I 
know  the  thoughts  that  I  think  toward  you,  saith 
the  Lord,  thoughts  of  peace  and  not  of  evil. "  (Jer. 
29:  II.) 

Many  of  God's  loving  thoughts  about  us  are  writ- 
ten in  the  Bible,  so  that  one  who  loved  God  very  much 
used  to  sing  when  he  was  reading  it,  "  How  precious 
are  thy  thoughts  unto  me,  O  God!"    (Ps.  139:  17.) 

But  God  has  a  great  many  more  thoughts  about  us 
than  all  He  has  written  down  in  the  Bible,  so  that 
David  says :  ''  Many,  O  Lord  my  God,  are  thy 
thoughts  which  are  to  us-w"ard,  they  cannot  be  reckoned 
up  in  order  unto  Thee,  if  I  would  declare  and  speak 
of  them,  they  are  more  than  can  be  numbered.  "  (Ps. 
40:  5.) 

The  sweetest  of  all  God's  thoughts  toward  us  is  that 
thought  of  his  heart  which  we  call   love.    One  of  the 
most   precious  things  in  all  the   Bible,  and  so  short 
that  the  smallest  child  can  remember  it  is — 
''God  is  Love, " 


SERMONS  FOR  CHILDREN, 


75 


Now,  if  God  first  loved  us,  we  ought  to  love  Him; 
If  He  thinks  loving  thoughts  of  us,  we  ought  not  to 
think  wicked  thoughts  of  Him.  We  say,  God  is  every- 
where, but  a  little  boy  once  said:  "There  is  one  place 
where  God  is  not."  Where?"  "  He  is  not  in  the 
thoughts  of  the  wicked. "  (Ps.  lo  :  4.)  If  our  hearts  are 
full  of  wicked  thoughts,  God  will  not  come  in  to  dwell 
there  as  His  temple.  But  God  will  know  of  our  bad 
thoughts,  for  the  Bible  says,  "  Thou  understandest  my 
thought  afar  off. "    (Ps.  139:  2;  Amos  4:  13.) 

When  Solomon  was  about  to  have  the  crown  put  on 
his  head,  and  be  a  king,  his  dying  father  told  him  to  be 
good,  even  down  in  his  heart;  because,  he  said,  '^The 
Lord  understandeth  all  the  imagination  of  the  thoughts." 
(I  Chron.  28 :  9.) 

And  you  remember  how  Jesus  said  to  some  people 
who  were  thinking  wicked  things  abcfiit  Him,  which  He 
could  see  in  their  hearts  because  He  was  God,  ''  Where- 
fore think  ye  evil  in  your  hearts?"    (Matt.  9:  4.) 

God  wants  us  to  give  up  all  our  wicked  thoughts  for 
loving  ones  about  Him,  such  as  He  has  about  us,  and  so 
He  says :  "  Let  the  wicked  forsake  his  way,  and  the  un- 
righteous man  his  thoughts,  and  let  him  return  unto 
the  Lord,  and  He  will  have  mercy  upon  him,"  (Isa. 
55:-7.) 

All  who  think  back  loving  thoughts  of  God,  to  his 
loving  thoughts  of  us,  will  have  their  names  written  in 
God's  book  of  His  special  friends,  for  it  says  in  the  Bible? 
"A  book  of  remembrance  was  written  before  Him,  for 
them  that  feared  the  Lord,  and  that  thought  upon  His 
name,''    (Mai.  3:  16.) 


76 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


As  God  has  written  His  loving  thoughts  toward  us 
in  the  Bible  on  earth,  will  we  not  have  loving  thoughts 
of  Him  written  in  the  Book  of  Remembrance  in 
Heaven  ? — Rev.  W.  F,  Crafts, 


Naaman. 

Read  for  opening  lesson  II  Kings  5:  1-16. 

To  day  I  want  to  tell  you  about  a  great  General  who 
lived  nearly  a  thousand  years  before  Jesus  came  to  this 
world.  I  will  put  his  name  on  the  board,  and  read 
about  him,  and  I  want  you  to  notice  what  is  said  of 
him  and  I  will  put  that  on  the  board.  (Write  at  top  of 
blackboard. j  Na-a-man.  (Read  verse  i,  clause  by  clause, 
except  the  last.)  What  is  he  called  ?  Captain  of  the  host. 
Yes  that  means  (write  on  board — see  diagram,)  He  was 
General  of  the  Army,  A  great  man.  Honorable, 
Mighty.  His  master  was  the  king  and  it  says.  He  had 
the  kings  favor,  (Write.)  We  may  be  sure  such  a 
brave  man  also  had  the  soldiers  favor  and  the  people's 
favor,  (Write.)  K.nd^\i!t\\'d.6.  Friends,  Riches,  Power, 
Honor,    Fine  clothes. 

(It  is  possible  by  questions  to  draw  out  the  very 
answers  you  want.) 

Who  would  like  to  be  in  Naaman's  place?  (Hands.) 
Yes  it  seems  as  if  it  would  be  grand  to  have  all  that  he 
had,  but  I  did  not  read  all  the  verse  to  you. 

(Read  last  sentence  —  put  on  board.) 

But,  He  was  a  (leave  space  here)  Leper.  (Describe 
this  terrible  loathsome  disease,  and  show  that  a  person 


SERMONS  FOR  CHILDREN, 


who  had  it  must  sooner  or  later  become  an  outcast  from 
home  and  friends  and  society.  Now,  who  would  be 
like  Naaman  ?  No,  no  one  would  be  as  he  was,  not  even 
for  all  he  had.  For  he  was  (write  before  the  word 
Leper,  the  words)  Poor,  Miserable,  Helpless,  His 
money  could  not  buy  health.  The  king  could  not  cure 
him.  Fine  clothing  could  hide  his  loathsomeness  from 
others,  but  not  from  himself.  How  much  this  leprosy 
is  hke  Sin,  It  was  in  the  blood  and  could  be  covered  up 
a  long  time  but  at  last  it  must  come  out  and  it  ends  in 
death.  We  may  have  friends,  riches,  honor,  power,  and 
fine  clothing.  We  may  be  called  great,  and  be  praised  of 
men,  but  sin  in  our  hearts  will  be  our  ruin  unless  it 
is  taken  away. 

Now  I  will  read  the  rest  of  the  story  and  we  will  see 
what  Naaman  did  and  how  he  was  saved.  (Read 
verses  2 —  16.)  Whom  did  he  hear  about  ?  God's  Prophet. 
(Write  on  blackboard — see  diagram.)  What  did  he  do? 
He  heard  of .  He  came  to.  He  obeyed.  He  was  healed. 
You,  are  like  Naaman.  Poor,  Miserable,  Helpless, 
Sinners,  Fine  clothes  cannot  cover  up  your  sins. 
Money  cannot  buy  salvation  for  you.  You  cannot  save 
yourself  But  there  is  a  Great  Physician,  a  mighty 
Healer,  able  and  willing  to  save  your  soul  from  sin  and 
death.  Like  the  Little  Maid "  in  Naaman  s  house, 
I  have  come  to  tell  you  about  Jesus  the  great 
Prophet  of  God  who  alone  can  heal  and  save  you.  Tell 
me,  once  more,  what  did  Naaman  do?  (Have  them 
read  from  blackboard.)  He  heard  of,  He  came  to,  He 
obeyed  Gods  Prophet.  He  zvas  Healed,  (Close  with 
prayer.)  —  W,  Jacobs, 


78 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


TTP  WAQ  General  of  the  Army, 

Hili  Wh.^     Great,  Honorable,  Mighty  Man. 

The  King's  Favor, 
The  Soldiers'  Love, 
HE  HAD    The  Peoples  Praise, 

Friends,  Riches,  Power, 
Honor,  Fine  Clothes, 

BUT  HE  WAS  A  ^""""^i^^oY^iS^^  LEPER. 

Heard  of 
HE  Came  to    GOD'S  PROPHET, 

Obeyed 


Sin,  and  its  Remsdy. 

Text  Keep  thy  heart  with  all  diligence,  for  out  of  it  are  the  issues  of  life.  Pr.  4 :  23. 

Objects  for  illustration,  A  grain  of  Corrosive  Subli- 
mate, and  some  Iodide  of  Potassium,  its  antidote, 
dissolved  separately  in  half-glasses  of  clear  cold  water. 
Handle  with  great  caution,  and  do  not  forget  to  destroy 
all  liquids  left  after  the  lesson. 

Leader.  (Holding  up  the  glass  of  poisonea  water.) 
"Children,  do  you  see  this  glass?  What  is  in  it? 

Answer.      Water. " 

''How  does  it  look?" 

"  Clear.  "    "  Good  to  drink.  " 

"How  many  would  drink  it?"  (Hands  up.) 

"If  I  should  tell  you  there's  poison  in  it,  and  that  if 
you  drink  it,  it  will  kill  you  how  many  of  you  would 
believe  it?"  (Hands  up.). 


SERMONS  FOR  CHILDREN. 


79 


*'  It  will  kill  you.    Do  you  believe  it  ?" 
"Yes.  " 

"  Why  do  you  believe  it  ?  " 

"  Because  you  say  so."    (Example  of  Faith,) 

"This  glass  with  the  poison  in  it  represents  the  heart  of 
an  unconverted  man  or  child.  No  matter  how  clear  and 
pure  it  seems,  it  contains  sin,  just  as  this  glass  con- 
tains poison.  Shall  I  tell  you  how  I  know?  The 
Bible  says  so.  You  believed  me  when  I  told  you  there 
was  poison  here  in  this  glass,  and  I  believe  God,  Vv''hen 
He  tells  me  in  his  book  about  the  wickedness  of  any 
heart  that  does  not  love  Jesus. 

Johnny,  bring  me  a  glass  of  pure  water  from  the 
pitcher.  Would  you  drink  this  ?  I  would,  because  I 
know  there's  no  poison  in  it.  It  is  pure  water.  But  let 
me  pour  a  little  of  this  poison  in  it,  would  you  drink 
it  then  ?  No,  indeed,  it  is  poisonous  too.  Just  so  an 
evil  heart  will  poison  other  hearts.  If  a  boy  uses  bad 
words  he  will  teach  his  companions  to  use  them  aLo. 

But  what  shall  I  do  now  with  this  poisoned  water? 
Leave  it  standing  carelessly  about  ?  No,  either  throw  it 
away  or  cure  it — destroy  the  poison  in  it.  That  is  what 
God  must  do  with  an  evil,  sinful  souL  If  we  won't  let 
Him  come  and  destroy  the  sin  out  of  our  heart.  He 
must  destroy  us.  But  look  now,  I  am  going  to  pour  in- 
to this  glass  of  poison  some  thing  which  will  destroy 
it- — belts  antidote  —  make  it  harmless.  Notice  what 
will  happen  first.  "  (Leader  holds  up  glasses  and  pours 
a  few  drops  of  the  Potass.  Iodide  into  the  poison. 
Notice  blood-red  sediment.     Scarlet, "  (Is.  i :  1 8)  like  sin.) 

"What  is  the  first  thing  the  antidote  does  ?" 


80 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


"  Shows  that  the  poison  is  there. 

"  And  what  must  the  sinful  heart  be  shown  the  first 
thing,  if  it  is  to  be  cured  ?  " 

"That  it  is  sinful.    That  there  is  sin  there." 

"  Do  you  know  what  it  is  that  shows  that  ?  It 
is  the  blessed  Holy  Spirit,  when  He  comes  into  the 
heart.  He  is  the  antidote,  the  destroyer  of  sin,  and  the 
first  thing  He  does  is  to  show  us  how  true  the  Bible  is 
when  it  says  we  are  sinners.  (Holding  up  the  glass.) 
Would  you  drink  the  water  now  ? 

"  No,  indeed.  '* 

"Why  not?" 

"Because  it  is  not  clear. " 

"  There  is  but  one  thing  that  can  make  this  water 
clear,  and  destroy  all  the  poison  in  it,  and  that  is  more 
of  the  same  thing  which  revealed  it  in  the  first  place. " 
Leader  pours  in  more  of  the  antidote,  and  the  liquid 
becomes  quite  clear.  The  poison  is  all  destroyed.  Illus- 
trate by  this  how  the  blessed  Spirit  destroys  sin  out  of 
our  hearts.  Close  the  lesson  with  prayer,  after  explain- 
ing and  teaching  by  heart  Is.  i :  i8  "Though  your  sins 
be  as  scarlet,  they  shall  be  white  as  snow."  —  By  Mrs. 
5.  M.  L  Henry. 


The  Weather. 

Job,  38  :  37.  —  'Who  can  stay  the  bottles  of  heaven  ? " 

In  the  Bible  lands  water  was  often  very  scarce,  and 
hence  very  precious,  and  whenever  it  was  necessary  to 
save  it  to  use  on  a  long  journey,  or  for  any  other  reason, 
it  was  generally  kept  in  bottles.    These  bottles,  so-called, 


SERMONS  FOR  CHILDREN, 


81 


were  made  of  the  skins  of  animals,  especially  of  the  goat, 
and  usually  were,  when  filled,  just  the  shape  of  the  live 
animal  with  the  head  and  feet  cut  off;  and  when  the 
people  wished  to  empty  the  skins  they  laid  them  on 
tlieir  sides  and  let  the  water  run  out. 

It  was  this  custom  which  led  him  who  spoke  the 
words  of  the  text  to  ask  "  Who  can  keep  the  water  in 
the  bottles  of  the  heavens  ?  "  as  often  in  poetry,  like  our 
text,  such  comparisons  are  made.  Now,  during  some 
weeks,  it  seems  as  though  the  bottles  of  heaven  had 
been  open  nearly  all  the  time,  and  I  am  afraid  some  of 
you  children  have  grumbled  about  it,  for  children  do  not 
like  rainy  weather;  and  hence  I  have  thought  it  a  good 
plan  to-day  to  find  an  answer  to  the  question  asked  in 
our  text,  and  then,  perhaps,  learn  that  it  is  not  best  to 
complain  of  the  weather. 

How  does  rain  come?  I  will  tell  you  one  way,  for 
there  are  many.  When  the  wind  blows  from  the  south- 
east it  comes  from  a  warmer  country  than  ours,  and  is 
often  filled  with  moisture.  As  long  as  the  wind  is  warm 
it  can  carry  this  moisture  through  the  sky,  and  no  one 
can  see  it  at  all ;  but  if;  in  its  journey  north,  it  meets 
some  colder  air,  and  begins  to  get  cold,  it  cannot  hold 
the  moisture  as  well,  and  so  it  forms  clouds.  Then, 
after  a  Httle,  as  the  air  grows  still  colder,  the  wind  is 
less  able  to  hold  the  moisture,  the  bottles  are  opened, 
and  down  comes  the  rain. 

Now  who  made  the  moist  wind  come  from  the 
south  ?  Was  it  not  God  ?  And  He  made  it  meet  the 
cold  wind,  which  squeezed  the  clouds  as  you  would 
squeeze  a  wet  sponge.    So  He  made  the  rain  to  fall. 


82 


CHILDREX'S  MEETIXGS, 


'V\'hen.  therefore,  we  have  stormy  weather,  we  will  re- 
member — 

First,  God  makes  it  rain.  He  knows  when  it  is 
needed,  and  sends  it  to  keep  the  ground  wet  enough  to 
make  the  trees,  plants,  and  flowers  grow.  So  that  one 
who  complains  of  the  weather  is  finding  fault  with  God. 

Second.  We  do  not  know  when  it  ought  to  begin 
or  to  stop  raining.  Two  years  ago  if  you  had  watched 
men  digging  post  holes  or  cellars,  you  would  have  seen 
that  the  ground,  three  or  four  feet  down,  was  dr}-  as  ashes, 
and  if  you  had  gone  out  into  the  countr\'  you  would 
have  learned  that  the  springs  were  dr\',  and  there  was 
very  little  water  in  the  wells  ;  and  yet  there  was  rain 
enough  to  make  the  corn  grow,  and  the  roads  were  very 
nice,  and  we  were  glad  that  it  rained  so  little.  But 
because  there  was  no  more  rain  the  trees  had  nothing 
for  their  leaves  and  roots  to  drink,  and  so  ver\'  many  of 
them  have  died.  Then,  last  year  it  rained  a  great  deal, 
and  everybody  grumbled  at  the  mud,  and  the  clouds, 
and  all  the  while  God  was  getting  the  ground  ready  to 
give  us  such  a  fruitful  season  this  year  as  we  have  not 
had  for  a  long  time.  And  now,  if  this  fall  it  rains  again  re- 
member that  God  knows  better  than  you  and  I  do,  how 
much  the  trees  need  to  drink,  and  how  much  rain  it  will 
take  to  keep  the  springs  full  and  keep  the  wells  from 
dr}-ing  up. 

Third.  We  should  remember  that,  if  the  rain  comes 
when  we  are  not  ready  for  it,  our  plans  are  of  very  little 
account.  You  don't  like  to  put  on  your  rubbers  and 
old  clothes  to  go  to  school;  you  wish  it  would  not  rain 
while  school  keeps.    Surely,  you  would  not  want  it  to 


SERMONS  FOR  CHILDREN. 


83 


rain  Saturday,  nor  all  vacation ;  and  your  father,  if  he 
keeps  store,  don't  want  it  to  rain  Saturday,  either,  for 
that  is  the  best  day  for  people  to  come  in  from  the 
country  to  trade.  Then  I  come  in  and  I  say  :  "  I  think  it 
is  bad  to  have  it  rain  Sundays,  for  there  are  so  many 
men  and  women  who  seem  to  feel  that  a  Sunday  rain  is 
the  wettest  of  all  rains,  and  that  it  will  wash  them  away 
if  they  go  out  in  it. "  So  all  the  time  it  can  rain  and 
suit  everybody  is  nights,  and  then,  how  muddy  the  roads 
would  be  every  day;  that  would  displease  everybody,  and 
by  the  time  you  had  everybody  suited  before  the  rain 
should  come,  it  would  not  come  at  all. 

Suppose  there  should  be  a  vote  taken  :  the  minister 
votes  against  Sunday;  the  wash-woman,  Monday,  the 
hay-makers,  Tuesday;  a  picnic,  Wednesday;  those  who 
want  to  go  to  prayer  meeting,  Thursday ;  the  temperance 
celebration,  Friday,  the  merchant,  Saturday,  I  rather 
think,  children,  that  we  had  better  let  the  rain  bottles 
alone  and  when  God  sees  fit  to  have  the  rain  come,  feel 
that  He  knows  best,  that  it  is  better  to  have  his  great 
plans  carried  out  than  our  little  ones;  and  more  than 
all,  we  should  not  allow  a  little  mud,  or  the  trouble  oi 
drying  clothes,  or  a  bad  feeling  in  our  hearts,  whei, 
it  is  cloudy  or  stormy,  to  lead  us  to  find  fault  with 
.Him  who  is  so  kind  as  to  send  His  rain  on  the  unthank- 
ful as  well  as  the  thankful. — Rev.  J.  G.  MerrilL 


84 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


CHAPTER  IX. 
OUTLINES. 
Salt. 

1.  Hold  a  lump  oi  salt  before  the  children.  Ask  what 
it  is.  Some  will  say  sugar,  some  salt.  Call  some  one  to 
taste  it.    No  mistaking  the  taste — salt. 

2.  Call  attention  to  the  following  facts,  (a.)  Salt 
has  a  taste  of  its  own,  not  like  anything  else,  (b.)  That 
it  makes  everything  it  is  mixed  with,  taste  like  it.  (c^ 
That  it  keeps  everything  it  is  mixed  with  from  spou- 
ing.  (d.)  That  unless  it  shows  by  its  taste  that  it  is 
3alt  it  is  good  for  nothing. 

3.  Teach  that  true  Christians  are  (a.)  Like  Christ 
the  true  salt,  but  unlike  other  people,  (b.)  That  those 
whom  they  go  with,  grow  to  be  like  them,  (c.)  That 
they  keep  the  world  from  being  wholly  ruined  by  sin.  (d.) 
That  Christians  who  are  not  seen  to  be  like  Christ  are 
good  for  nothing  in  the  world. — Bv  Marv  G.  Burdeite. 


A  Little  Cake. 

Text.— I.  King^s,  17  :  13. 

(Read  the  story  of  Elijah  and  the  widow  of  Zaraphath, 
I.  Kings,  17:  8-16,  then  close  the  book,  and  draw  out  the 
leading  points  from  the  children.) 


OUTLINES. 


85 


What  would  have  resulted  if  EHiah  had  been  unwill- 
ing to  be  fed  by  a  poor  woman 

What  if  the  widow  had  not  obeyed  the  prophet,  but 
had  supplied  her  own  wants  first? 

God  wants  "a  little  cake  first"  from  us. 

1.  'The  first  of  our  money. — Prov.  3:  9. 

2.  The  first  of  each  day  for  studying  His  word,  and 
thinking  about  him. — Ps.  5 :  3. 

3.  The  first  of  our  lives  given  to  Him. — Eccl.  12:  I. 
Result.    Rom.  11 :  16. 


The  Vine  and  the  Branches. 

Bible  Lesson.— John  15  1-8. 

Object  for  Illustration. — A  piece  of  a  freshly 
cut  grape-vine  with  grapes  grovv^ing  from  it,  and  dead 
branches  and  briars  tied  on.    Also  another  branch,  Hv- 
ing,  healthy,  but  bearing   nothing  out  leaves." 
Teaching  Outlines^ 

1.  Jesus  is  the  vine;  Christians,  the  branches;  God, 

the  husbandman. 

2.  The  branches  are  frail. 

3.  The  branches  bear  the  grapes,  not  the  vine. 

4.  But  they  get  all  their  life  from  the  vine. 

5.  The  sap  from  the  vine  enters  the  branch  at 

points  of  connection.  (Prayer,  Bible-study^ 
etc.) 

6.  Fruitful  branches  are  purged.^ 


*Explain  why  and  how  a  vine  dresser  prunes  his  vines.  Tell  how  giving  up 
worldly  pleasure,  trials,  afflictions  discipline  the  Christian  to  "bring forth  more 
fruit." 


86 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


7.  A  wise  husbandman  never  trims  the  branches 

too  closely.    I  Cor.  10 :  13. 

8.  Fruitfulness  glorifies  not  the  branch,  but  the 

husbandman. 

9.  What  is  the  use  of  the  branch  that  bears  "noth- 

ing but  leaves  ?" 

10.  Who  are  the  briars  and  the  dead  branches  tied 

on  ?    (What  are  you  ?) 

11.  What  shall  be  done  with  them?  (verse  6.) 

Adapted  from  Knox  P.  Taylor 


The  Candle  Sermon. 

Text:  Ye  are  the  light  of  the  world.   Matt.  5:14. 

Material  needed  :  K  stiff  paste-board  box  with  holes 
cut  in  the  bottom  for  the  candles.  Set  the  box  on  a  table 
upside  down,  and  insert  the  candles  as  they  are  required. 
Besides  this  it  is  necessary  to  have  white  and  colored 
candles  of  various  sizes,  a  large-mouthed  bottle,  a  piece 
of  magnesium  wire,  a  silver  dollar,  a  pair  of  candle  snuf- 
fers, some  thin  tapers,  and  a  moist  sponge  with  which  to 
put  out  the  candles  at  the  close  of  the  exercise. 

Ask  all  the  children  to  repeat  your  text  after  you. 
Jesus  said  "  Ye  are  the  light  of  the  world."  Talk  a  little 
about  physical  light,  then  lead  jn  to  mental  light,  as 
where  the  child  sees  a  truth;  thence  go  to  spiritual  light, 
and  say  that  we  will  to-day  illustrate  by  these  candles  the 
way  in  which  we  may  be  the  spiritual  light  of  the  world. 

I.  Place  a  plain  white  candle  in  its  socket  or  hole. 
No  light.    Why?    Because  it  is  not  lighted.    Light  the 


OUTLINES. 


87 


candle.  Now  it  burns.  We  are  of  no  use  unless  we 
give  light;  the  light  that  Christ  speaks  of  when  He 
says,  "Ye  are  the  light  of  the  world."  That  is  what 
Christians  are  for,  to  give  light  to  the  world. 

II.  Now  exhibit  some  colored  candles.  Light 
them.  Call  attention  to  the  fact  that  they  give  no  more 
light  than  the  plain  candles.  Does  their  color  or  beauty 
help  them.  No.  For  purposes  of  light  giving  they  are 
no  better  than  others.  Moral:  Fine  clothes,  elegant 
houses,  money,  do  not  take  the  place  of  light-giving.  If 
we  give  no  light  they  are  really  hindrances.  We  must 
beware  how  we  take  pride  in  any  such  things. 

III.  Now  light  the  smaller  candles,  and  a  taper  or 
two.  See,  they  give  light,  too.  Moral :  Let  no  one  say, 
"I  am  too  Httle,  or  too  young.  If  I  was  like  my  mother 
or  teacher  I  would  shine,  but  it  is  no  use,  I  am  too 
small."  Shine  as  much  as  you  can.  That  is  all  God  asks 
of  you. 

IV.  Snuff  one  little  candle  carelessly,  so  that  it  shall 
be  put  out.  Moral :  Some  old-fashioned  deacons,  and 
other  folks,  snub  the  little  lambs  and  discourage  them. 
But  Jesus  said,  "  Let  them  come  ! " 

V.  All  this  time  a  very  large  candle — say  eighteen 
inches  long — has  been  standing  in  a  candle-stick  at  your 
side,  unlighted.  So  far  you  have  said  nothing  about  it. 
Now  call  attention  to  it.  Show  that  the  little  burning 
tapers  are  of  more  use  than  the  big  unlighted  candle. 
An  unlighted  candle,  however  big,  is  useless.  So  an 
unconverted  man,  however  old  or  learned,  is  of  no  use  to 
God,  or  to  his  fellow  men.  He  must  first  give  light 
''Let  your  light  shine,"  said  Jesus. 


88 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


VI.  Now  take  a  little  burning  taper,  and  with  it 
light  the  big  candle.  See,  the  little  taper  lighted  the  large 
candle !  Yes,  so  is  it.  By  God's  grace  little  children 
can  often  lead  their  parents  to  God. 

VII.  Take  a  small  lighted  candle  in  your  hand  and 
hold  a  silver  dollar  in  front  of  it.  Can  you  see  the  light 
well?  No,  it  is  obscured.  Why?  Because  the  dollar  is 
too  near  it  ?  So  let  the  love  of  money  gather  around  the 
Christian's  heart  and  his  light  grows  dim,  the  Sunday- 
school  languishes,  foreign  missions  die  out,  church  debts 
are  not  paid,  because  the  Christian  loves  his  dollar  too 
much.    ''The  love  of  money  is  the  root  of  all  evil" 

VIII.  Now  take  a  piece  of  magnesium  wire  about 
three  inches  long  and  burn  it.  It  will  light  up  a  large 
room  brilliantly.  It  soon  goes  out.  It  is  like  a  flash- 
light. So  some  people  are  fiash-Christians,  They  burn 
very  bright  in  tevivals,  but  six  wxeks  after  where  are 
they?  Backsliding.  The  light  has  gone  out.  How 
great  that  darkness !  Better  burn  less  brightly  and  more 
steadily. 

IX.  But  what  is  this?  A  bottle.  Yes,  that  re- 
minds me  of  the  "  black  bottle "  you  see  in  the  rum- 
shops.  Invert  it  over  a  small  candle,  and  in  half  a  min- 
ute the  candle  is  extinguished.  Well,  that  is  just  the 
way  with  the  Christian's  light  when  the  bottle  gets  hold 
of  him.  (Temperance  anecdotes.) 

X.  But  now  I'll  turn  this  deep  paper  box  over  one 
of  the  candles  and  make  it  tight  around  the  bottom  so 
not  one  gleam  of  light  can  shine  out.  Now  we'll  all  stop 
and  sing  "Jesus  bids  us  shine,"  and  afterward  we'll  see 
how  the  little  candle  that  isn't  letting  its  light  shine,  gets 


OUTLINES. 


89 


along.  After  the  song,  lift  the  box.  If  air  tight,  the 
candle  has  gone  out.  So  with  Christians,  if  they  will 
not  let  their  light  shine,  they  themselves  will  die  out. 

XI.  As  each  candle  is  lighted  let  it  keep  on  burning.^ 
By  this  time  you  will  have  six  or  seven  burning.  Call 
attention  to  the  fact  that  all  were  lighted  from  the  first 
candle.  Does  that  one  lose  light  in  consequence  ?  Well, 
you  need  never  be  afraid  to  be  a  light  to  others  lest  you 
should  burn  less  brightly  yourself  "  There  is  that  scat- 
tereth  and  yet  increaseth." 

XII.  Now  ask  all  the  children  to  repeat  the  verse,  "I 
am  the  light  of  the  world."  Jesus  said  this.  Did  any  of 
these  candles  light  themselves  ?  No.  All  had  to  be 
lighted  from  outside.  So  with  us,  we  must  first  go  to 
Jesus  to  get  light,  for  He  is  the  Light  of  the  world.  , 
Only  after  we  have  got  light  from  Him  can  we  give  any 
light  to  others.  Now,  won't  some  one  right  here  and 
now,  go  to  Him  and  ask  Him  for  spiritual  light?  Close 
with  an  earnest  appeal,  and  sing,  "  The  Light  of  the 
world  is  Jesus." — Arranged  by  Rev,  A,  F,  Schauffler. 


tThe  Two  Cups. 

Now,  my  little  men  and  women,  what  have  I  in  my 
hands  ?  (Hold  up  two  bottles,  precisely  alike,  one  filled 

*  If  one  of  the  candles  should  burn  out  while  you  talk,  say,  "Yes,  candles 
will  burn  down  and  go  out,  but  Christians  need  not.  And  when  their  light  seems 
to  be  extinguished  by  death,  they  are  only  translated  to  the  skies,  where  they 
shall  sparkle  and  glow  always.  "They  that  be  wise  shall  shine  as  the  brightness 
of  the  firmament,  and  they  that  turn  many  to  righteousness,  as  the  stars,  forever 
and  ever."   Dan.  12:3. 

t  Arranged  from  a  lesson  originally  given  in  a  children's  meeting  at  Lake 
Bluff,  by  Mrs.  S.  M.  I.  Henry. 


90 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


with  water,  the  other  with  alcohol.)  Here,  let  us  write 
the  names  upon  the  black-board.  On  the*  right  side, 
"  Water, "  on  the  left  side  "  Alcohol. "  You  know  very 
well  what  the  first  word  means.  The  second  is  Arabic, 
the  language  of  the  people  you  have  read  about  in  the 
"Arabian  Nights."  And  the  word  Alcohol  (El  Gohul 
is  the  right  way  to  spell  it)  means  Great  Evil  Spirit^ 
It  wasn't  enough  to  call  it  the  evil  spirit,  but  the 
Arabians,  because  they  had  never  found  any  thing  else 
that  did  so  much  harm,  called  it  the  great  evil  spirit. 
Now  what  does  "  alcohol  "  mean  ? 

But  is  it  not  curious  that  the  bottles  look  so  much 
alike?  Which  is  which?  Can  you  tell?  (Let  children 
guess.)  I  don't  believe  you  can,  for  I  confess  to  you  I 
don't  know  myself.  But  we  can  soon  find  out,  that  is, 
if  the  druggist  has  been  fair  about  it,  for  I  told  him  to 
fill  one  with  pure,  harmless,  pleasant  cold  water,  and 
the  other  with  alcohol  which  has  made  more  people 
wicked  and  sick  and  sad  than  any  thing  else  upon  the 
fpce  of  the  earth.  Now  how  can  I  find  out  which  bottle 
has  the  water  and  which  the  alcohol?  (Let  children- 
exert  their  ingenuity  at  this  point.  They  will  be  apt 
to  say  some  things  that  you  can  write  upon  the  black- 
board under  the  word  ''alcohol. ") 

Suppose  I  should  pour  a  little  from  the  bottles  into 
two  saucers,  and  offer  them  to  your  dog  when  he  is 
thirsty,  which  would  he  drink?  The  water.  Could  I 
coax  him  to  drink  the  other?  No,  he  wouldn't  unless 
I  held  him  tight  and  got  somebody  to  hold  his  jaws 
open  while  I  poured  down  the  wretched  stuff.  And  it 
would  be  just  so  if,  instead  of  alcohol  I  had  some  one  of 


OUTLINES. 


91 


the  other  drinks  that  people  sell  in  saloons  and  like  to 
drink  because  of  the  alcohol  that  is  in  them.  Name 
some  of  these  drinks.  (Children  name  "brandy," 
whisky, "  '^beer, "  "wine,"  "cider,"  and  leader  write  the 
words  down  in  smaller  letters  under  the  word  "  alcohol.  " 
Different  colored  crayons  could  be  used  to  imitate  the 
colors  of  the  drinks.  Keep  clearly  before  the  children 
that  alcohol  is  the  peculiar  ingredient  in  them  all.) 
But  to  go  back  to  these  little  bottles  that  look  so 
much  alike.  Suppose  I  should  offer  some  of  the  alco- 
hol to  a  horse  or  cow,  would  they  drink?  No,  and  yet 
some  people  try  to  make  us  believe  that  we  need  alcoholic 
drinks  to  make  us  strong.  But  the  strongest  man  can 
not  carry  what  a  horse  can,  yet  from  which  of  these 
bottles  would  the  horse  drink  if  at  all  ? 

Now,  let  us  see  what  other  way  I  could  take  to  find 
out  which  is  which.  How  many  of  you  have  a  baby 
brother  at  home?  (Hands  up.)  Or  a  sister?  Suppose  I 
should  pour  out  a  table-spoonful  of  the  water  and 
gently  feed  it  to  the  baby.  Would  it  hurt  him  ?  But 
suppose  I  should  give  it  a  table-spoonful  of  alcohol? 
It  would  go  into  fits  and  probably  die.  Why?  Because 
God  made  the  water  for  us  to  use,  but  we  were  not 
made  to  drink  alcohol,  nor  anything  that  has  alcohol  in 
it,  because  it  burns  us  in  our  stomach  and  brains.  It 
burns  a  man's  cheek  and  nose  too  if  he  keeps  at  it  long 
enough.  You  all  know  that.  The  only  living  creature 
that  would  choose  to  drink  the  alcohol  would  be  some 
poor  fellow  who  had  got  his  stomach  so  crazy  that  it 
wanted  to  be  burned,  and  his  brain  so  crazy  that  it  was 
willing  the  burning  should  take  place.    The  Indians  call 


92 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


drinks  that  have  alcohol  in  them  "  fire-water because 
they  burn  so.  But  what  way  can  we  take  to  find 
out  ?  Suppose  we  drop  this  white  of  an  egg  in  water, 
i^Leader  breaks  an  egg  in  water)  will  it  be  changed  ?  See, 
not  at  all.  But  suppose  tiie  water  was  hot  ?  Now  we 
will  pour  out  a  little  of  this  alcoliol  and  drop  the  white 
of  another  egg  in  it.  What !  is  it  being  cooked  ?  Sure 
enough !  Children,  our  brains  are  something  like  this 
egg,  and  alcohol  hardens  them,  if  we  use  it,  just  in  the 
same  way.  That's  what  makes  a  drunken  man  stagger 
so,  when  he  tries  to  walk,  and  talk  so  strangly  when 
he  tries  to  talk.  And  then  if  I  should  pour  from  each 
bottle  on  two  lilies  just  alike,  what  would  happen? 
One  would  be  fresher  and  brighter,  the  other  would 
shrivel  up  and  be  spoiled.  For  one  is  the  water  of  life, 
and  the  other  the  water  of  death.  (Write  these  two 
names  on  the  black-board,  under  their  respective  syno- 
nyms. Also  write  down  a  word  of  two  to  stand  for 
each  test  as  you  bring  it  forward.) 

But  I  want  to  find  out  which  is  which  right  here  and 
now.  How  can  I  ?  "  Taste  "  says  somebody.  No,  I  have 
signed  the  pledge.  I  would  no  more  taste  than  I  would 
take  poison.  "Smell;"  No,  that  is  too  disagreeable.  I 
am  obliged  to  do  that  every  time  I  pass  a  saloon,  or  a 
man  who  drinks,  and  that  is  as  often  as  I  can  endure. 
Can  you  not  think  of  some  harmless  way  ?  See,  I  will 
pour  out  what  is  in  each  bottle  into  a  plate.  Now  I 
w^iil  soak  a  piece  of  paper  in  each.  Now  I  will  light  a 
match,  and  which  of  the  two  papers,  will  burn ;  surely 
not  the  one  wet  with  water,  for  water  puts  out  fire, 
but  the  one  wet  in  alcohol,  the  fire-water.    (Now  per- 


OUTLINES. 


93 


form  the  experiment.)  Here,  this  is  the  bottle  that  had 
the  great  evil  spirit  corked  up  in  it,  and  this  had  the 
"  pure  and  sparkling  water.  " 

Now  let  us  repeat  some  of  the  texts  out  of  God  s 
book  in  praise ol  water.  (Ps.  147:  7-8.  Ps.  65  :  9-10. 
Marks  9:  41.  Let  these  texts  be  repeated  by  leader 
and  echoed  by  children.  Or,  being  assigned  before- 
hand, they  may  now  be  read  or  recited  by  the  children 
designated,  the  Leader  explaining  and  emphasizing.) 

And  now  we  will  see  what  the  Bible  says  about 
strong  drink:  Prov.  20:  i — wine  deceives.  Prov.  23: 
29-32— its  effect  upon  the  body.  Is.  28  :  i — its  effect  up- 
on the  mind.    I  Cor:  6-10 — its  eternal  effect. 


Bible  Temperance  Lesson. 

Boys  and  girls  know  a  great  deal  about  animals.  Let 
us  talk  to-day  about  the  most  fierce  and  terrible 
animal  that  you  can  think  of.  What  is  it  called?  [The 
lion  will  be  mentioned. 
Draw  a  lion's  head,  or 
if  you  cannot  draw,  pin 
one  cut  from  a  book  or 
paper,  on  the  board.] 
The  lion  you  can  see  but 
seldom.  Now  right  by 
the  side  of  this,  I  will  put  the  head  of  another  kind  of 
animal  which  you  see  every  day.  [Let  this  be  a  man's 
head.  The  children  will  exclaim  at  this.  Some  do  not 
know  that  man  is  an  animal.    Explain  that  fact  and  tell 


94 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


that  he  was  made  in  God's  image,  and  was  given 
heart  and  reason  and  will.  The  lion  will  rouse  the  greater 
interest.  Children  always  like  to  hear  about  lions. 
They  are  big  and  fierce,  and  make  such  a  horrible  noise. 
Call  out  what  they  know  of  the  habits  of  the  lion,  throw- 
ing in  bits  yourself.]  But  why,  you  wonder,  do  I  put  a 
man  by  the  side  of  the  lion?  The  lion  loves  to  kill  and 
destroy.  There  is  no  safety  but  in  keeping  out  of  his 
way.  Can  it  be  that  there  are  men  who  are  like  him  in 
this  ?  If  so,  we  want  to  know  who  they  are,  that  we 
may  keep  out  of  their  way. 

What  book  is  this  ?  The  Bible.  Whose  word  is  it  ? 
[Print,  or  write  plainly,  Jer.  5:6:  lion  out  of 

the  forest  shall  slay  them."]  Now,  it  is  true  that 
there  are  man-lions  all  around,  waiting  to  slay  you,  and 
lest  you  may  not  know  them  when  you  see  them,  we 
want  to  tell  you  who  they  are  and  what  they  are  like. 
May  be  you  think  you  are  safe;  you  know  that  a  lion  can 
kill  you,  but  you  say  you  are  not  afraid  of  a  man.  Ah! 
but  they  are  waiting  to  slay  you — you  Henry,  and  you 
John.  You  cannot  go  into  the  street  of  some  cities,  but 
you  come  upon  their  dens.  You  may  have  passed  some 
of  them  to-day.  I  have,  and  just  out 
of  sight  behind  those  doors  are  men 
who  are  trying  to  catch  and  slay  you.  I 
will  make  an  entrance  to  one  of  these 
dens.  [Make  an  open  door  with  the 
screen  just  inside.  The  children  will 
know  at  once  that  it  is  a  saloon.] 

How  many  of  you  have  seen  this  kind  of  a  trap? 
(Show  real  mouse  trap,  if  possible,  with  bait  of  cheese.) 


OUTLr.VES. 


95 


Such  a  nice,  safe-looking  little  house!  Here  is  a  pretty 
room  and  something  to  eat — a  free  lunch  beside!  Must 
just  take  a  few  steps  to  get  it !  But  the  mouse  thinks 
there  is  no  danger.  He  only  finds  himself  in  another 
pleasant  room.  But  he  finds  too  late  that  the  door 
doesn't  open  to  let  him  back! 

Here  is  what  God  says  again  about  such  people.  Jer. 
5:26.  "For  among  my  people  are  found  wicked  men. 
They  lay  wait  as  he  that  setteth  snares :  they  set  a  trap, 
they  catch  men."  You  are  not  afraid  of  these  lions,  for 
they  do  not  roar:  they  do  not  rush  out  at  you  and  devour 
you  at  once.  No,  but  they  "set  a  trap."  Here  is  one 
of  the  traps.  [Sketch 
a  cigar.]  That  is  a 
very  little  trap  you 
may  think,  but  a 
great  many  are 
caught  by  it.  Here 
is  another  [make  a  glass  of  beer].  How  many  of  you 
have  seen  such  a  trap  as  this  ?  Where  may  it  always  be 
found  ?  Here  is  an  innocent  looking  lit- 
tle trap  [a  dice  box  with  dice].  Ah!  how 
many  have  been  caught  by  it.  Now, 
boys,  you  know  very  well  that  just  such 
traps  as  these  are  sure  to  be  set  in 
drinking  places.  Wouldn't  you  bet- 
ter look  out  for  the  men  who  "  lay  wait,"  who  "  set  a 
trap,"  who  "  catch  men,"  as  the  Bible  says,  and  who,  like 
the  lion  out  of  the  forest,  make  it  their  business  to  slay 
all  they  can  catch?  Their  dens  may  look  very  pleasant 
and  harmless,  but   they   are  not   so.     There  ought 


CmLDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


to  be  great  piles  of  bones  at  the  entrance,  for  they  kill 
men  inside.  [Tell  yEsop's  fable  about  the  lion  vvho  com- 
plained to  the  fox  that  he  did  not  visit  him  when  he  was 
sick.  The  fox  excused  himself  by  saying  that  he  came 
to  the  door  of  the  den  and  found  so  many  bones  that  he 
did  not  feel  hke  going  farther.] 

Boys,  don't  be  deceived ;  and  girls,  try  and  keep  every- 
body away  from  the  nice  room  in  which  you  see  the  cigar, 
the  glass  of  beer  and  the  dice  box!  They  are  little  traps, 
leading  you  into  a  larger  and  stronger  trap  which-  will 
surely  snap  and  shut  you  in !  Wicked  men  are  inside. 
They  have  set  the  traps;  they  catch  men,  and  they  love  to 
catch  boys,  too,  for  boys  grow  to  be  men.  Are  not  these 
men  like  lions? — Miss  Martha  Van  Marter, 


Being  Converted.* 

Explain  what  it  is  to  be  converted  :  changed,  so  that 
the  bad  disposition  is  taken  out  of  us. 

I.  Children  may  be  converted.  They  all  belong  to 
Jesus,  and  he  means  to  save  them  all,  if  he  can.  He 
does  not  mean  to  let  Satan  get  one  of  them.  He  said 
"Suffer  little  children  to  come  unto  me,  and  forbid  them 
not,  for  of  such  is  the  kingdom  of  heaven."  Jesus  tells 
all  the  children  in  their  hearts,  to  come  to  Him.  A 
little   girl  was  going  to  repeat  a  text  in  a  Sunday- 

*This  admirable  lesson  was  contributed  by  Mrs.  Willing  after  the  lesson  on 
page  63  was  in  type.  We  are  happy  tj  present  it,  as  showing  the  mind  of  instruc" 
tore  of  children,  as  to  the  need  of  definite  Gospel  teaching  existing  with  the  young 
as  well  as  the  old.— Eds, 


OUTLINES,  97 


school  concert.  She  became  scared  and  partly  forgot  it, 
so  she  said :  "  Let  all  the  little  children  come  to  me. 
Theyll  all  come  straight  along  if  you  don't  stop  them." 

2.  Children  must  be  converted.  They  have  bad 
hearts.  They  cheat  in  school.  They  are  cross  at  home. 
They  snarl  when  they  are  told  to  do  something  that 
they  do  not  like  to  do.  They  strike  back.  They  hate 
folks  that  are  mean  to  them.   They  tell  wrong  stories. 

They  are  sorry,  and  try  to  do  better,  but  they  can't. 
Their  mothers  feel  badly  because  they  are  so  naughty, 
but  they  can't  make  the  poor  little  hearts  good.  No- 
body can  but  Jesus.  May  be  they  do  not  do  these 
wicked  things,  but  their  hearts  are  bad,  all  the  same. 
Illustrate  by  the  story  of  a  little  girl  of  six  who  was 
never  naughty,  yet  who  was  given  by  the  Holy  Spirit  to 
see  her  bad  heart,  and  who  could  not  stop  crying  about 
it  till  Jesus  took  it  and  made  it  new. 

3.  How  can  they  be  converted?  They  must  give 
up  trying  to  make  their  own  hearts  right.  Illustrate  by 
the  story  of  a  little  girl  who  said  she  did  not  want  to 
say,  "  for  Jesus'  sake "  any  more  when  she  prayed,  because 
she  could  "  be  good  her  own  self."    Show  how  she  failed. 

They  must  promise  to  do  all  the  things  Jesus  wants 
them  to  do. 

They  must  come  to  him  for  a  new  heart.  He  said, 
*^  Come  unto  me."  They  must  believe  He  takes  them. 
He  said,  "  Him  that  cometh  unto  me  I  will  in  no  wise 
cast  out."  They  must  believe,  "  He  takes  me  as  I  am." 
He  does  forgive  rny  sins  and  gives  me  a  new  heart. 
"  Believe  on  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ  and  thou  shalt  be 
saved." 


98 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


4.  They  must  have  all  the  bad  taken  out  of  the 
heart.  After  Jesus  forgives  their  sins  they  find  it  hard 
work  to  do  right  always.  Illustrate  by  a  little  Quaker 
boy,  who  said,  "  I  know  the  Lord  forgave  my  sins  when 
the  load  rolled  off  in  the  meeting,  but  I'm  not  converted 
just  rights  yet,  for  I  get  mad  sometimes  when  the  boys 
tease  me." 

Let  us  all  go  to  Jesus  and  be  converted  ''just  ri^htl 
Mrs.  y.  F,  Willing. 


Walking  Christians. 

Read  the  story  of  the  lame  man  healed  at  Lystra.   Acts  14;  10. 

Had  he  only  leaped  the  people  might  not  have  be- 
lieved.   Walking  a  proof  of  his  cure.    A  Christian's 
walk,  or  life,  a  proof  of  his  conversion. 
A  Christian  should  walk  for  Jesus. 

When  ?     Every  day. 

Where?    In  the  paths  Jesus  would  choose. 

How  ?      Step  by  step. 
Some  of  the  steps. 

An  angry  thought  crushed. 

A  kind  word  spoken. 

An  unkind  act  forgiven. 

A  temptation  resisted. 
Two  reasons  why  Christians  sometimes  do  not  walk. 

1.  Lame. 

2.  Too  weak. 

Lame. — They  are  crippled  bv  some  sin.   How  can  we 


OUTLINES. 


^0 


be  cured?  Go  to  the  Great  Physician  "who  forgiveth  all 
thine  iniquities,  who  healeth  all  thy  diseases." 

Too  weak — Because  they  have  not  fed  their  soul 
upon  God's  word. 

How  can  we  feed  upon  it  ?  Learn  a  verse  every  dayc 
Think  about  it;  ask  God  to  help  us  understand  5t.— 
Carrie  B,  Reynolds^ 


100 


CHAPTER  X. 
OUTLINES. 
The  Bible-Boy's  Crown. 


Like  Isaac,  Obedient;  - 
"    Joseph,  Pure;  - 
"    Moses,  Faithful;  - 
"    Samuel,  Prayerful; 

David,  Courageous; 
"    Solomon,  Wise ; 
"     Daniel,  Temperate; 
God,  his  Father. 
Heaven,  his  home. 


-  Love,  his  watchword. 
Truth,  his  girdle. 

-  Faith,  his  shield. 
The  Spirit,  his  Teacher 

-  The  Word,  his  sword. 
The  Bible,  his  guide. 

-  Self-denial,  his  habit. 
Jesus,  his  Saviour. 
Eternal  life,  his  portion. 

A  Crown  of  Victory,  his  reward. 

B.  F.  Jacobs. 


OUTLINES. 


101 


The  Whole  Armor. 

Text. — "Put  on  the  whole  armor  of  God."    Eph.  6  :  ii. 

Introductory. 

Where  was  the  text  written  ?  Whom  did  Paul  see 
most  frequently  in  prison  ?  Roman  soldier  to  whom  he 
was  bound.    Describe  the  armor  of  a  Roman  soldier. 

Use  of  an  armor?  Protection. 

Name  some  of  the  "good  fights"  which  a  Christian  is 
to  fight.  Intemperance  everywhere;  impatience,  ill«tem- 
per,  selfishness — all  kinds  of  sin  striving  to  enter  our 
own  hearts. 

How  to  become  God's   soldiers  ?     Enlist.  Take 
Jesus  for  our  Captain,  and  obey.    He  met  sin  and  died 
on  the  cross,  that  we  might  conquer  sin  and  temptation 
by  trusting  in  Him,  and  following  His  example. 
The  Armor. 

After  enlisting,  put  on  the  whole  armor  The 
Christian  s  armor  is  not  of  iron,  but  is  stronger  than  iron. 

Its  parts  are: 

The  Girdle — Truth.  (Saying  what  is  right.)  Illus- 
trate by  story  of  some  noble,  truth-loving  child. 

Breast-plate — Righteousness.    (  Doing  what  is  right.) 

Shoes — Gospel  of  Peace.  Illustrate  by  Achilles,  who 
could  only  be  wounded  in  the  heel.  Many  Christian 
soldiers  wounded  in  the  feet.  Lose  their  souls  on  "slip- 
pery places" — going  to  balls,  saloons,  etc. 

Helmet — Salvation.  Protection  for  our  brains,  eyes, 
tongues,  against  sinning. 

Shield— Faith. 


102 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


Closing  Thought. 

Take  Sword  of  Spirit  also — Word  of  God.  This  is 
not  part  of  an  armor,  but  a  weapon. 

The  Mohammedans  write  texts  from  their  Koran 
(explain)  on  their  sword  blades  before  they  go  to  war, 
but  our  Bible  is  itself  a  sword  blade,  covered  all  over  by 
the  word  of  the  eternal  God.  Our  sword  is  made  up  of 
words  without  any  blade. 

"Suppose  I  were  a  soldier,  and  did  not  know  much 
how  to  use  a  sword,  it  would  not  be  of  much  use  to  me, 
would  it?"    "No,  sir." 

"And  if  we  have  gilt-edged  Bibles  with  gold  clasps, 
and  do  not  read  or  use  them,  they  will  not  help  us  much, 
will  they?"    "No,  sir." 

"Bibles  must  be  used — thought  about,  studied,  talked 
of.  If  a  child  is  tempted  to  steal,  can  you  think  of  any- 
thing  that  will  help  keep  it  from  stealing?"  "*Thou 
shalt  not  steal. " 

"And  suppose  you  were  tempted  to  tell  a  lie?" 
"*  Lying  lips  are  an  abomination  to  the  Lord.'*' 

"That  is  drawing  the  sword,  isn't  it?  Suppose  a  boy 
is  tempted  to  get  angry,  is  there  anything  in  the  Bible 
for  him?"  "'Take  my  yoke  upon  you  and  learn  of  me, 
for  I  am  meek  and  lowly  in  heart."' 

"Can  you  think  of  anything  else?"  "*  A  soft  answer 
turneth  away  wrath.' " 

So  let  us  conquer  every  temptation  by  wearing  the 
girdle  of  Truth,  the  breast- plate  of  Righteousness,  the 
shoes  of  the  Gospel,  the  helmet  of  Salvation,  and  the 
shield  of  Faith;  and  by  wielding  the  sword  of  the  Spirit. 

Adapted  from  Rev.  W.  F.  Crafts. 


OUTLINED.  103 


Acrostics, 

"  Watch."— Mark  14:  38. 

W  ords. 
A  ctions. 
T  houghts. 
C  ompany. 
H  earts. 


"Love."— Pb.  119:  97. 

L  earn 


We        O  bey 

Must     V  alue  ^ords  JESUS. 

E  mploy 


What  to  do. 

B  uy  one. 
I  nvestigate. 
B  elieve  it. 
L  ove  it. 
E  mploy  it. 


The  Bible. 


What  it  is. 

B  lessed 
I  nheritance 
B  ringing 
L  ife 

E  verlasting. 
Prof,  C.  JV.  Jero7ne. 


The  Rebellious  City. 

I  want  to  tell  you  about  a  city.  Listen  while  I  de- 
scribe it,  and  maybe  you  can  guess  its  name. 

The  city  had  a  wall  around  it,  and  to  take  care  of  the 


104 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


wall  were  two  keepers,  each  having  hve  servants ;  and 
there  were  two  strong  men  always  ready  to  help  when  told 
to  do  anything.  There  were  two  gates  in  the  wall,  and 
two  w^atch-towers  out  of  which  to  look  when  danger  was 
near.  There  was  a  cistern,  and  a  wheel  turning,  and 
there  was  a  pitcher  at  the  fountain.  There  was  a  golden' 
bowl  fastened  with  a  silver  cord,  and  there  was  a  mill  like 
two  stones  moving  against  each  other  and  grinding  all 
that  was  put  between  them.  The  King  who  owned  that 
city  wanted  to  come  into  it,  but  it  was  all  shut  up  tight. 
Then  He  sent  people  with  trumpets  to  go  about  it;  their 
voices  came  in  through  the  gates  of  the  city,  but  still  it 
was  kept  closed.  A  long,  long  time  the  King  tried  to  get 
in.  He  could  have  taken  it  by  force  for  He  had  built  it 
in  the  first  place,  and  it  was  His  own  city,  but  He  chose 
to  stay  outside  till  He  should  be  welcomed  in. 

After  awhile  the  wall  began  to  get  very  old;  the 
strong  men  got  so  old  that  they  could  scarcely  walk 
about;  the  keepers  trembled  when  they  tried  to  do  any- 
thing, and  all  the  servants  were  too  old  to  do  their  duty. 
Even  the  watch-towers  became  so  dark  that  they  were 
no  longer  of  any  use.  At  length,  one  day  the  strong  men 
were  found  dead,  and  so  were  the  keepers  and  all  the 
servants.  The  mill  had  stopped  grinding,  the  pitcher 
was  broken  at  the  fountain,  and  the  silver  cord  was 
loosed.  Then  the  sorrowful  King  went  in  and  took  the 
city.  If  He  had  only  been  allowed  to  come  in  before, 
He  would  have  made  it  one  of  the  happiest  cities  in  the 
world,  but  without  Him  it  was  always  full  of  trouble. 
Can  you  tell  me  the  name  of  the  city  ?  Dear  ones,  it  was 
the  heart  of  a  man  who  did  not  love  God.   God  was  the 


OUTLINES, 


105 


King  who  wanted  to  get  in.  Ministers  and  Sunday- 
school  teachers  were  the  people  God  sent  with  the 
trumpets,  and  the  trumpets  were  the  Bibles  from  which 
they  read  God's  words. 

Let  the  leader  now  give  carefully  the  meaning  of  the 
symboHsm  of  Eccl.  12:  1-7,  in  every  point.  The  city  is 
the  heart;  wall,  body;  gates,  ears;  keepers,  hands;  strong 
men,  legs;  mill,  teeth;  watch-towers,  eyes;  fountain  and 
cistern,  heart;  pitcher  and  wheel,  lungs;  golden  bowl, 
skull;  silver  cord,  spinal  cord;  white  leaves,  gray  hair. 
As  far  as  possible  have  the  children  touch  the  parts  of 
their  bodies  named.  Close  by  urging  them  to  let  the 
King  come  in  while  their  keepers,  etc.,  are  young.  Teach 
them  that  by  faith  in  the  loving  Christ,  He,  the  King  of 
glory,  will  come  in,  and  bring  with  Him  the  only  true  hap- 
piness.— Mrs.  W,  F.  Crafts, 


First  Fruits. 

^  A  LESSON  ON  THE  TITHE. 

Read  Deut.  26:  i-ii,  for  a  beautiful  explanation  of 
the  law  of  first  fruits.    If  the  children  are  small,  give  the 
narrative  in  simple  words  of  your  own. 
God's  Share, 

Teach  the  children  that  God  has  always  required  His 
people  to  give  Him  a  share.  Tell  the  story  of  the  first 
two  children  (Gen.  4:  3-5),  and  show  how  wrong  offer- 
ing was  followed  by  anger  by  hatred,  by  murder. 


106 


CHILDREX'S  MEETINGS. 


God  claims  for  His  special  service  a  portion  of 
His  people,  their  time,  their  money. 

He  receives  a  share  of  His  people  when  we  set  apart 
and  support  certain  ones  for  His  ministry. 

We  give  Him  a  share  of  our  time  by  keeping  the 
Sabbath. 

We  give  Him  a  share  of  our  money  by  spending  a 
portion  entirely  for  His  cause. 

But  when  we  give  God  a  share  of  our  time  it  is 
because  it  all  belongs  to  Him ;  and  when  we  set  apart 
certain  viinisters  for  God's  special  service  it  is  in  order 
that  we  all  may  serve  Him  better.  So  when  we  spend 
a  share  of  our  money  for  religious  purposes  it  is  a  prom- 
ise that  all  our  money  shall  be  rightly  used. 
What  share  of  our  niouey  shall  z^'e  give  f 

Abraham  and  all  the  children  of  Israel  gave  the  tenth 
of  their  increase,  or  income.  Jesus  approved  this  (Luke 
1 1  :  42^ ;  and  all  Christian  people  who  have  given  the  tenth 
to  the  Lord  have  been  greatly  blessed  and  prospered. 

When  a  part  of  God's  people  give  their  whole  time 
to  God's  service,  the  entire  people  is  prospered  more  than 
where  all  work  for  themselves. 

Where  we  give  one  day  entirely  to  God's  work  we 
can  do  more  in  the  other  six  than  when  w^e  try  to  use  all 
seven  for  ourselves. 

So  when  we  give  the  tentJi  of  our  money  to  God's 
special  service,  He  makes  the  other  nine-tenths  do  more 
for  us  than  the  whole  would  do. — A.  S,  Car7nan. 


Note  for  Leader.— Simplify  the  above  as  may  be  necessary,  and  explain 
the  tenth  by  illustrating  with  pennies  for  ihos©  of  the  children  who  have  not  studied 
fractions. 


OUTLINES. 


107 


The  Widow's  Son. 

Locate  on  map,  and  describe  the  village  of  Nain.  If 
you  can  show  picture  from  Bible  geography  or  diction- 
ary, good. 

Jesus  visited  Nain  only  once  (illustrate  by  visit  to 
your  place  of  some  great  man)  met  a  funeral,  broke  it 
up.    Would  you  like  to  know  how  ? 

It  was  the  only  son  of  a  widow,  who  was  dead.  De- 
scribe the  procession,  body  wrapped  in  cloth  lying  on  a 
bier,  weeping  women,  heart-broken  mother.  Jesus 
stopped  them,  said  "  Young  man,  I  say  unto  thee,  arise !" 
Tell  how  the  dead  arose,  and  how  Jesus  gave  him  to  his 
mother,  alive  and  well.  Jesus  is  the  Life-giver.  No  one 
ever  died  in  His  presence. 

There  are  other  dear  friends,  only  sons,  dear  children, 
whose  bodies  are  dead  now  in  sad  homes  waiting  to  be 
carried  out  to  burial.  Jesus  sees  that  it  is  not  best  to 
raise  the  bodies  of  all  our  friends,  for  death  is  the  "  door 
to  Heaven"  to  a  soul  that  loves  Jesus.  But  worse  than 
that,  there  are  dead  souls  all  around  us,  "dead  in  sin." 
Illustrate — explain.  Jesus'  great  work  is  to  give  life  to 
these  dead  souls.  He  has  given  life  to  some  of  us,  oh, 
let  us  tell  about  him  to  every  one.  And  if  there  is  one 
here  who  has  not  been  made  alive  and  well  by  Jesus, 
why  not  come  to  Him  to-day?  He  wants  us  to  come. 
One  of  His  saddest  complaints  was  "Ye  will  not  come 
unto  me,  that  ye  may  have  life.'' 

He  made  the  widow's  son  well. 

He  will  make  us  well. 


108 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


He  gave  him  back  to  his  mother. 
He  will  give  us  back  to  God,  "without  spot  or  blem- 
ish."— Adapted  from  Mrs.  George  R.  Partridge, 


The  Sunday  School  Scholar's  Responsibility. 

Five  things  which  the  teacher  cannot  do  for  the 
scholar. 

Be  present  and  punctual  in  the 

scholar's  place. 
Learn  the  lesson- 
Do  the  giving. 
Do  the  praying. 
Accept  Christ. 

So  even  the  children  have  great  responsibility  in  the 
Sunday  School  work. — Mrs.  Caroline  M.  Harris. 


Lessons  from  the  Magnet. 

Read  Matt.  11'  28;  Matt.  16   24:  Mark  10:  14;  John  12:  32. 

Place  on  the  table  before  the  children  a  variety  of 
nails  and  bits  of  iron.  Show  how  readily  a  good-sized 
magnet  will  drazu  these  nails,  repeating  the  w^ord  ''draw'' 
frequently.  Then  state  that  the  magnet  represents 
Christ  in  his  power  to  draw  all  the  world  to  Him.  The 
nails  represent  mankind,  large  and  small. 

To  illustrate  how  sinners  may  get  between  Christ  and 
other  sinners  and  keep  them  from  Him,  get  a  few  large 
and  very  rusty  crooked  nails.    Place  them  on  the  table 


Teacher  cannot 


OUTLINES. 


109 


between  the  bright  nails  and  the  magnet.  When  the 
magnet  is  pressed  against  the  rusty  nail  it  is  not  drawn, 
and  neither  will  it  allow  the  nail  beyond  to  be  drawn. 
By  and  by  let  them  both  fall  to  the  floor.  During  all, 
represent  the  rusty  sinners  as  "keeping  back."  Let's  go 
fishing  instead  of  to  Sunday-school."  "What's  the  use 
of  going  to  church?" — and  so  illustrate  responsibility, 
"  He  that  is  not  for  Christ  is  against  Him."  Then  even 
a  professing  Christian  may  act  somewhat  the  part  of  the 
rusty  sinner.  Careless  and  lukewarm  friends  stand  in 
the  way  of  other  friends. 

To  illustrate  walking  by  faith,  place  a  bit  of  iron  under 
a  sheet  of  paper.  Place  the  magnet  over  it,  and  move 
this  about  so  all  can  see  the  iron  following. 

The  need  of  consecration  on  the  part  of  those  who 
would  be  successful  workers  may  be  shown  by  a  knife- 
blade,  which  at  first  seems  to  be  powerless  to  attract,  but 
after  being  in  contact  with  the  magnet,  will  itself  attract. 
As  the  nails  are  picked  up  one  by  one  by  the  knife-blade 
let  them  be  transferred  to  the  magnet. 

Notice  that  a  small  knife-blade  may  transfer  to  the 
magnet  a  large  bit  of  iron.  A  lesson  for  the  very  young. 
Knox  P,  Taylor, 


110 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


CHAPTER  XI. 

OUTLINES  ON  THE  BEATITUDES. 

1. — BLESSED  ARE  THE  POOR  IN  SPIRIT,  FOR  THEIRS  IS 
THE  KINGDOM  OF  HEAVEN. 

1.    The  Fact. 

"  Blessed  are  the  poor  in  spirit/' 

1 .  Who  are  the  poor  in  spirit  ? 

Those  who  do  not  think  much  about  themselves. 
Those  who  are  not  proud. 

2.  A  commando    Rom.  I2:  3-    Phil  2:  3. 

3.  Illustration.  Parable  of  the  Pharisee  and  the 
Publican.    Luke  18:  10-14. 

IL.    The  Promise, 

"Theirs  is  the  Kingdom  of  Heaven." 

1 .  God  has  given  a  special  promise  of  his  pres<^;nce 
to  those  that  are  "  poor  in  spirit."    Is.  57:15. 

2.  The  Christian  already  has  the  Kingdom  of 
Heaven  begun  in  his  heart.    Matt.  13  131-32. 

3.  We  shall  come  into  full  possession  of  the  King- 
dom of  Heaven  by-and-by.    Matt.  25  :  34. 


OUTLINES  ON  THE  BEATITUDES 


111 


II.— BLESSED    ARE    THEY    THAT   MOURN,    FOR  THEY 
SHALL  BE  COMFORTED. 

I.  The  Fact, 

"  Blessed  are  they  that  mourn." 
I.    Causes  of  mourning  on  earth, 
(a.)    Our  own  sins, 
(b.)    Others'  sins. 

(c.)    Loss  of  property — health — friends, 
(d.)  Death. 

II.  The  Promise, 

They  shall  be  comforted." 
I,    Comfort  comes  because  we  know  that 

(a.)    Sorrow  and  trouble  are  not  always  a  mark 

of  God's  displeasure,  (Example,  Job.) 
(b.)    But  for  our  discipline,  and  to  show  His  love. 
Heb.  12:6. 

(c.)    No  loss,  sickness,  poverty,  death* — no  sin  at 

all  in  Heaven, 
(d.)    Even  here,  if  we  ask,  Jesus  will  take  away 

all  our  sins. 

(e.)  Even  here,  in  midst  of  deepest  mourning, 
Jesus  is  with  us  to  ''comfort"  us.  Matt.  28  :  20. 
Is.  66:  13. 


III. — "BLESSED  ARE  THE  MEEK;  FOR  THEY  SHALL  IN- 
HERrr  THE  EARTH." 


I.    The  Fact. 

"  Blessed  are  the  meek."* 


113 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


1.  What  is  meekness? 

"Soft  answers  to  rough  words." 

2.  Illustration.    The  meekest  man.    Num,  12:  3. 
How   did  he  suffer  for  losing  his  meekness  just 

once.^    Num.  20:  1-12. 
Our  Pattern. — He  "who  when  He  was  reviled,  re- 
viled not  again,  when  He  suffered,  threatened  not." 

3.  How  may  we  become  meek.^    By  learning  of  Christ. 

Matt.  II  :  29. 
If  Christ,  the  Son  of  the  Highest,  could  be  meek  and 
lowly,  how  much  more  should  we,  who  are  cauea  "worms 
of  the  dust." 

II.    T/ie  Promise. 

"They  shall  inherit  the  earth." 
In  one  sense  they  inherit  the  earth — ^joy  of  health, 
beauty  of  flowers,  etc. — already,  but  when  Christ  comes 
as  King,  His  people  also  will  be  kings  and  priests  and 
will  reign  on  the  earth.    Rev.  5  :  10. 


IV. — "BLESSED  ARE   TIIEV  WHICH   DO   HUNGER  AND 
THIRST  AFTER  RIGHTEOUSNESS  FOR  THEY 
SHALL  BE  FILLED." 

I.    The  Fact. 

"  Blessed  are  they  which  do  hunger  and  thirst 
after  righteousness. 
I.    What  is  righteousness? 

Right-ness — being  right. 
Let  children  illustrate  by  naming  actions  proceeding 
from  a  right  heart — from  one  not  right. 


OUTLINES  ON  THE  BEA  TI TUBES. 


113 


2.    What  is  it  to  hunger  and  thirst  ? 

Can  any  one  take  comfort  in  anything,  think  of 
anything  else,  when  really  hungry  and  thirsty? 
If  hungry  and  thirsty  for  righteousness,  one  will 
not  hunger  for  any  sinful  thing.  (Let  children 
mention  such  things. 

II.    The  Promise, 

"They  shall  be  filled." 

1.  God  satisfies  the  hunger  for  food,  of  every  Hving 

thing.    Ps.  145  :  16. 

2.  He  will  much  more  satisfy — "fill" — those  who  hun- 

ger for  righteousness.    Is.  44:  3.    John/:  37. 

3.  How?    I  Cor.  i:  30,  and  Ezek.  ii:  19. 


V. — "BLESSED  ARE  THE  MERCIFUL;  FOR  THEY  SHALL 
OBTAIN  MERCY." 

I.    The  Fact, 

"  Blessed  are  the  merciful." 

1.  God  our  pattern  of  mercy.    Eph.  4:  32    Ps.  103:  4 

Luke  6 :  36. 

2.  Mercy  in  the  heart  will  show  in  our  actions.    I  John 

3:  17-18. 

3.  We  shoulH  show  mercy  cheerfully;  many  kind  deeds 

art  spoiled  by  the  unpleasant  way  in  which  they 
are  done.    Rom.  12:  8.  1.  c.    II  Cor.  9:  7. 

II.    The  Promise. 

"  They  shall  obtain  mercy." 
Example. 
Mordecai. 


114 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


He  showed  mercy.    Esth.  6:2. 
He  obtained  mercy.    Esth.  6:  3-8-9,  and  lO: 
2-3. 

2.  God  will  show  mercy  to  the  merciful  on  the  final  day 

of  reward.    Matt.  25  :  31-46. 

3.  Who  can  give  you  a  heart  full  of  mercy? 

Ezek.  36:  26. 


VI. — "  Blessed  are  the  pure  in  heart  ;  for  they 

SHALL  see  god." 

1.    The  Fact. 

"Blessed  are  the  pure  in  heart.** 

1.  Question.    Who  are  "pure  in  heart?"    Is  a  murder- 

er, thief,  swearer,  pure  in  heart  ?  Is  any  uncon- 
verted man  pure  in  heart?  How  about  the  un- 
converted boys  and  girls  ? 

2.  Answer  by  illustration. 

Cover  a  bottle  of  ink  or  dye  with  stained  paper,  to 
represent  a  hardened  sinner.  Another  with  white  paper, 
to  represent  an  unconverted  boy  or  girl. 

The  outward  appearance  is  different  in  the  two  cases, 
but  there  is  impurity  within  in  both  cases.  No  sprink- 
ing,  pouring,  immersing  or  washing  of  the  outside  can 
cleanse. 

Label  one  of  the  bottles  "  Pure  Water ; "  that  does 
not  change  the  contents.  Neither  does  public  profes- 
sion, or  a  moral  life  make  a  person  a  Christian.  The  im- 
purity will  remain  until  the  bottle  is  emptied  and  washed 
out.  So  our  hearts  are  full  of  wickedness  until  Christ 
has  cleansed  them. 


OUTLINES  ON  THE  BE  A  TITUDES, 


115 


3.    How  may  people  know  what  kind  of  hearts  we 
have? 

(a.)    By  our  faces.    Acts  6:  15, 

(b.)    By  our  words.    Matt.  12:  34. 

(c.)    By  the  company  we  keep.    Prov.  1 3 ;  20. 

Ps.  I  :  1-3, 
(d.)    By  our  actions.    Matt.  7:  20, 

II,    The  Pro7nise, 

They  shall  see  God. 

1 .  Earthly  kings  let  none  see  them  but  the  beauti- 
ful, rich,  or  great.  But  God  requires  only  a  pure  heart. 
I  Sam.  16:  7  I.  c. 

2.  If  we  love  Him  we  shall  want  to  see  Him.  Is. 
25:  9. 

3,  We  shall  not  see  Him  on  earth  with  our  natural 
eyes  (I  Tim.  6:  16),  but  the  Holy  Spirit  will  reveal  the 
things  of  God  to  our  spirits.    John  16:  14,  15. 

4,  We  may  see  God  in  our  own  hearts  purifying  (I 
John  I:  9),  transforming  (II  Cor,  3:  18),  keeping  (Jude 
24.) 

VII. — "BLESSED   ARE   THE  PEACEMAKERS,   FOR  THEY 
SHALL  BE  CALLED  THE  CHILDREN  OF  GOD." 

!•    The  Fact. 

"  Blessed  are  the  peace-makers." 
f.    Who  is  a  peace-maker?    (Give  illustrations.) 

2.  Who  is  the  great  Peace-maker?  II  Cor.  5  :  18-19, 

3.  How  may  a  child  gain  the  blessedness  of  a  peace- 
maker?    By  trying  to  check  quarrels  among  children,  or 


116 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


others,  and  by  trying  to  bring  others  to  be  at  peace  with 
God.    II  Cor.  5  :  20. 

4.  Can  one  not  himself  at  peace  with  God  do  this 
last  work?    Matt.  15:  14. 

5.  Does  anything  hinder  you  from  trying  to  be  such 
a  peacemaker  ? 

IL    T/ie  Promise, 

"  They  shall  be  called  the  children  of  God." 

1 .  The  great  honor  of  being  called  children  of  God/ 
(Illustration,  child  of  a  king,  or  the  President.) 

2.  Who  will  call  them  such  ? 

(a.)    Men.    "  He's  a  real  Christian  ! " 
(b.)    God.    II  Cor.  6:  18. 

3.  Why  will  God  call  them  "  children  ? " 

(a.)  Because  they  are  children  of  God.  See  I 
John  3:  I,  Revised  Version.  "And  we 
are!" 

(b.)  Because,  like  an  earthly  parent,  He  delights 
to  call  them  "children."  Father  says, 
"  My  own  little  girl !     "  My  dear  son." 


OUTLINES. 


117 


CHAPTER  XII. 
OUTLINES. 

A  Robe  of  Righteousness. 

TBXT:    Is.  6i:  la 

1.  A  white  robe.    Rev.  7 : 9. 

2.  A  complete  covering.        61 :  10. 

3.  It  will  never  wear  out.    Illustration,  Deut.  8 :  4. 

4.  The  most  costly  of  all  garments,  although  a  free  gift 

to  us.    II  Cor.  S  :  21. 

5.  Without  it,  none  can  enter  Heaven.  Rev.  22:14.  r.v. 

6.  If  one  should  enter  without  it,  Heaven  would  be  no 

place  for  Him.   Matt,  22 :  1 1-12. 
7*    This  garment  is  given  to  all  who  truly  mourn  for  sin. 
Is.  61:3. 

8.  Our  own  works  of  righteousness,  done^*;^  order  to  be 

saved,  of  no  avail.  Is.  64:6.  Our  good  works 
must  be  done  for  Christ  because  he  has  saved  us. 
Phil.  I  :  II. 

9.  This  garment  must   be   kept  white.    Eccl.  9:  8. 

James  i :  27. 

10.  We  may  have  Christ*s  help  in  keeping  it  free  from 

stains.   Jude,  r^.Jc 


118 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


Sowing  and  Reaping. 

I.— SOWING. 

1.  Sowing  always  precedes  reaping. 

2.  We  are  sowing  all  the  time ; — thoughts,  words,  and 

actions. 

3.  Two  ways  of  sowing  . 

To  please  ourselves — 
To  please  God.    Gal.  6:8. 

3.  Different  kinds  of  seed  often  resemble  each  other. 

4.  Sometimes  the  difference  is  not  shown  until  the  reap- 

ing; but  the  difference  is  there  all  the  time.  Matt. 
13:24-30. 

5..  Weeds  do  not  need  cultivating,  they  grow  of  them- 
selves, and  often  choke  the  good  seed. 

6.  Why  should  we  sow  good  seed  always  and  every-' 

where?    Eccl.  11:6.    Is.  32  :  20.  f.  c. 

7.  If  we  belong  to  Christ,  he  will  give  us  good  seed  to 

sow.    II  Con  9:  10.    r.  v. 

8.  If  we  do  not  belong  to  Christ,  we  cannot  sow  good 

seed. 

9.  Let  us  take  care  of  the  sowing,  and  God  will  see  to 

the  reaping. 


11. — REAPING.  * 

I.    The  fruit  reaped  always  corresponds  to  the  seed 

sown.    Gal.  6:7,  » 


This  may  be  a  separate  lesson. 


OUTLINES. 


119 


2.  The  amount  reaped  is  greater  than  the  amount 

sown.    Hos.  8:7.    f.  c. 

The  whirlwind  differs  from  the  soft  summer  breeze 

in  a7nounty  not  in  kind, 
"  Sow  an  act,  and  you  reap  a  habit ;   sow  a  habit, 

and  you  reap  a  character;  sow  a  character,  and 

you  reap  a  destiny." 

3.  It  is  often  a  long  time  between  sowing  and  reaping, 

Eccl.  8:11.  James  5  :  7. 

4.  Reaping  time  sure  to  come  at  last.    Gal.  6  \  7.  Ps. 

126:6. 

5.  Are  you  sowing  what  you  wish  to  reap? — Adapted 
from  ''Bible  Notes.'' 


Water. 

I.  Let  the  children  guess  the  subject. 

II.  Ask  what  it  is  used  for?  They  answer,  drink- 
mg,  washing,  making  things  grow,  running  water-mills 
and  steam-engines,  sailing,  baptism,  etc. 

III.  Take  up  a  glass  of  water. 
Ask: 

1.  Does  anybody  dislike  water ? 

2.  Can  you  get  along  without  it  ? 

3.  Do  you  have  to  pay  for  it  ? 

(Next  offer  a  drink  to  several.    Some  will  refuse.) 
4.  Did  those  who  drank  have  to  furnish  the  waten 
pump  it,  bring  it,  pour  it  out.  or  even  ask  for  it  ? 
Then  it  is 


120 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


1.  Good. 

2.  Indispensable.  (Explain.) 

3.  Free. 

4.  To  be  had  by  just  accepting  it. 

IV.  Let  the  children  spell  the  word  Gift  from  the 
initial  letters;  then  impress  the  lesson  that  water  is  a 
gift  from  God. 

V.  The  Water  of  Life.    Show  that  the  same 
things  are  true  of  it,  and  in  greater  measure.    Use  texts 
Is.  55  :  I ,  Rev.  22 :  17,  etc. 

Many  are  refusing  the  water  of  life. 


The  Master  is  Come,  and  Calleth  for  Thee. 


1.  How  did  those  sisters  first  become  acquainted  with 

Jesus  ?    Luke  10  :  38-42. 

2.  Jesus  loved  them.    John  11:5. 

3.  They  had  been  kind  to  Him,  and  now  He  comes  to 

help  them  in  trouble. 

4.  He  comes  to  do  for  them,  that  which  they  want  most 


5.    Martha  brings  His  message  to  Mary  and  to  you. 


And  calleth  for  Thee, 

6.  He  calls  gently. 

7.  Mary  arose  quickly  to  go  to  Him.  Will  you  do  the 


Tell  the  stoiy  of  Mary  and  Martha.  John  11:1-45. 


cf  all. 


''The  Master 


same  r 


OUTLINES. 


121 


"  If  I  come  to  Jesus,  He  will  make  me  glad ; 
He  will  give  me  pleasure,  when  my  heart  is  sad. 
If  I  come  to  Jesus,  happy  I  shall  be; 
He  is  gently  calling  little  ones  like  me." 


The  Promises.* 

How  Many? 

There  are  thirty  thousand  promises  m  the  Bible; 
eighty-two  for  each  day  in  the  year. 

What  Kind? 

Exceeding  great  and  precious.    II  Peter  i  :  4. 

Sure.    I  Kings  8  :  56. 

Conditional, 

"  Those  that  seek  me  early,  shall  find  me." 
"  If  we  suffer  with  Him,  we  shall  also  reign 
with  Him."    Etc.,  etc. 

To  Whoiu? 

Acts  2:  39.   Rev,  22:  17,  "Whosoever  will." 
Have  you  made  God  a  promise  ? 
Will  you  not  make  one  now  ? 


The  Judgment. 

Who  will  be  Judge  at  the  great  trial  ?    II  Tim. 
4:1. 


*  Have  the  subject  previously  announced,  and  each  child  prepared  to  repeat 
a  promise  from  the  Bible. 


122 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


^ho  will  be  judged  ?     Rev.  20  :  12-13  . 
Who  will  be  the  officers  ?    Matt.  1 3  : 49. 
What  will  be  the  capital  offence?    John  5  \^0, 
What  will  be  the  decision  of  the  Judge?  Matt 
25  :  35-41. 

Will  there  be  any  chance  of  having  that  sentence 
reversed  ?    EccL  11:3.    1.  c. 


Loaves  and  Fishes, 

John  6  :  5-14, 

1.  It  was  a  small  offering. 

2.  It  was  brought  by  a  little  lad. 

3.  He  was  not  ashamed  to  offer  it. 

4.  It  was  all  he  had. 

5.  He  did  not  wait  until  he  had  more;  thousands 
might  have  starved  if  he  had. 

6.  What  he  had  was  put  to  the  best  use. 

7.  Without  Christ's  blessing  it  was  scarcely  enough 
for  one.  With  Christ  s  blessing  enough  to  feed  five 
thousand. 

8.  Jesus  might  have  worked  the  miracle  without  the 
lad's  help,  but  it  was  not  His  way. 

Question.  Did  the  lad  himself  fail  to  receive  all  he 
needed? 

Christ  waiteth  for  our  barley  loaves. — Rev,  D, 
RundelL 


Note. — This  is  the  only  miracle  mentioned  in  all  four  gospels. 


OUTLINES. 


123 


Charcoal. 

Text. — "  Prepared  unto  every  g-ood  work."— II  Tim.  2:  21. 

Let  the  teacher  procure,  if  possible,  a  bit  of  charcoal 
which  has  been  used  in  an  electric  lamp.    If  not  obtain- 
able, show  a  common  bit,  explaining  the  difference. 
I.    It  is  only  charcoal. 
2     It  has  helped  to  light  a  great  city. 

3.  But  not  by  its  own  light.    (Teacher  explain  flow  of 

electric  current.) 

4.  It  had  to  be  specially  prepared,  ground  to  powder — 

mixed  and  molded — fitted  for  its  work. 

5.  God's  children  have  to  be  specially  fitted  for  their 

work. 

6.  Then  the  electric  current  of  God's  love,  flowing 

through  them  will  make  them  shine. 
(Illustrations.    Moses.    David.  -  Paul.) 

7.  The  charcoal  lasts  only  a  night. 

8.  Our  time  to  shine  here  is  short,  let  us  shine  while  we 

may. 

9.  God  can  make  diamonds  out  of  charcoal.  (Explain.) 

10.  They  shall  be  mine,  saith  the  Lord,  when  I  make  up 

my  jewels. — Rev.  E.  D,  RundelL 


124 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

OUTLINES. 

The  First  Missionaries, 

Let  the  foundation  of  this  lesson  be  some  part  of  the 
journeying  of  Paul  and  Barnabas — the  two  first  mission- 
aries— for  instance,  through  Iconium  and  Lystra.  Acts 
14:  1-20.  Enclose  in  a  large  square  three  little  squares 
in  different  colors,  to  represent  Iconium,  Derbe  and 
Lystra.  Tell  what  the  missionaries  did  at  Iconium. 
Draw  out,  incidentally,  that  the  people  there  were 
divided;  "part  held  with  the  Jews,  and  part  with  the 
apostles;**  and  if  you  can  do  so  without  diverting  the 
attention  too  much  from  the  missionary  thought  of  the 
lesson,  make  a  moment's  practical  application  by  drawing 
a  white  line  through  the  little  square  represent- 
ing the  city,  and  proceeding  something  as  follows: 
"  Do  you  know,  I  think  that  this  is  the  way  it  is  among 
children — and  right  in  this  class.  There  is  a  line  drawn 
here.  Part  of  my  class  love  and  obey  Jesus  and  part  do 
not.  We  can  not  see  the  line,  but  God  can.  Some- 
times we  can  tell  by  the  way  children  act  which  side  of 
the  line  they  are  on,  but  God  does  not  have  to  wait  for 
their  acts. 

Tell  how  the  missionaries  staid  a  "  long  time  there,* 
but  finally  fled  to  Lystra  and  Derbe.    Draw  a  journey 


OUTLINES. 


125 


line  from  place  to  place  as  you  talk.  Pause  at  Lystra 
and  describe  the  healing  of  the  lame  man.  Make  a 
crooked  mark  for  him,  and  straighten  it  as  you  speak  of 
his  cure.  Now  tell  of  the  excitement — the  crowd  in  the 
streets,  the  bringing  of  oxen,  and  the  attempted  sacrifice: 
and  tell  how  the  two  men,  while  bravely  and  humbly 
hastening  to  prevent  the  sacrifice,  seized  the  chance  to 
preach  about  the  one  God,  and  His  goodness  to  the 
children  of  men. 

Now  turn  to  the  missionary  work  going  on  in  these 
days.  Your  opportunity  here  will  be  measured  by  what 
you  have  been  doing  to  familiarize  your  children  with 
missionary  work  in  the  months  past.  How  familiar  are 
they  with  mission  stations?  To  what  special  missions 
have  they  contributed  of  late  ?  Can  you  select  three  or 
four,  outline  their  location  and  imagine  a  ship  with  all 
the  children  on  board  going  out  to  call  on  them  ?  A  few 
wavy  dashes  with  blue  crayon  will  sufficiently  represent 
water,  and  any  sort  of  a  white  mark  will  stand  for  the 
ship.  Can  you  have  certain  distinctly  defined  facts  about 
each  station,  for  the  class  to  learn  during  their  call? 
What  news  can  the  children  carry  them  ?  That  they  are 
praying  daily  for  the  missionaries  by  name?  That  they 
remember  the  little  heathen  boy  or  girl  who  lives  at  this 
station?  You  see,  teachers,  the  possibilities  of  such  a 
lesson  provided  you  have  former  teaching  to  fall  back 
upon.  If  you  have  not  it  would  be  well  to  select  one 
field.  Outline  it,  take  the  children  to  visit  it,  learn  the 
name  of  one  missionary  and  the  needs  of  the  people,  and 
so  interest  the  children  to  labor  and  pray  for  at  least  one 
missionary  station. — By  Mrs,  G,  R.  Alden,  {Pansy).. 


126 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


Bible  Missionary  Lesson, 

The  leader,  a  few  days  before  this  lesson  is  to  be 
taught,  should  assign  the  texts  mentioned  to  the  children, 
and  ask  them  to  come  prepared  to  recite  them.  A  pos- 
tal card,  or  better  still,  a  genuine  letter,  containing  the 
text  and  request,  will  not  only  stimulate  interest  and 
study,  but  insure  attendance  on  the  meeting.  Let  the 
texts  be  numbered,  that  there  be  no  delay  or  confusion 
in  answers.  Then,  as  each  verse  is  given,  let  leader 
'  talk  freely  with  the  children  about  it — explaining,  illus- 
trating, emphasizing.  The  leader  should  call  out  the 
texts  by  questions  something  as  follows; 

Question. — What  did  the  Lord  Jesus  say  about  giv~ 
ing? 

(No.  I  recites.)  It  is  more  blessed  to  give  than  re- 
ceive.   Acts  20:  35. 

Q.    What  kind  of  a  giver  does  God  love  1 

No.  2.    God  loveth  a  cheerful  giver.    II  Cor.  9:7. 

Q.    How  have  we  received,  and  how  should  we  give? 

No.  3.  Freely  ye  have  received,  freely  give.  Matt. 
10:  8. 

Q.    How  much  should  we  give? 

No.  4.  Every  man  shall  give  as  he  is  able,  according 
to  the  blessing  of  the  Lord  thy  God,  which  he  hath  given 
thee.    Deut.  16:  17. 

Q.    What  is  the  least  that  we  should  give  ? 

No.  5.  Of  all  that  thou  shall  give  me,  I  will  surely 
give  the  tenth  unto  Thee.    Gen.  28:  22. (See  p.  105.) 

Q.    How  are  our  gifts  accepted  ? 

No-  6.    If  there  be  first  a  willing  mind  it  is  accepted 


OUTLINES. 


127 


according  to  that  a  man  hath,  and  not  according  to  that 
he  hath  not.    II  Cor.  8:  12. 

Q.    How  should  we  honor  the  Lord  ? 

No.  7.  Honor  the  Lord  with  thy  substance,  and 
with  the  first  fruits, of  all  thine  increase.    Prov.  3  :  9. 

Q.    What  promise  does  God  make  to  such? 

No.  8.  So  shall  thy  barns  be  filled  with  plenty,  and 
thy  presses  shall  burst  out  with  new  wine.    Prov.  3 :  10. 

Q.    What  is  said  of  him  that  pities  the  poor  ? 

No.  9.  He  that  hath  pity  upon  the  poor  lendeth 
unto  the  Lord,  and  that  which  he  hath  given  will  He 
pay  him  again.    Prov.  19:  17. 

Q.    How  shall  we  give? 

No.  10.  Every  man  according  as  he  purposeth  in 
his  heart,  so  let  him  give;  not  grudgingly,  or  of  necessity, 
for  God  loveth  a  cheerful  giver,    II  Cor.  9:  7. 

Q.    From  whom  doth  God  accept  offerings  ? 

No.  II.  Of  every  man  that  giveth  it  willingly,  with 
his  heart,  ye  shall  take  my  offering.      Ex.  25  :  2. 

Q.    How  often  should  we  give  ? 

No.  12.  Upon  the  first  day  of  the  week  let  every 
one  of  you  lay  by  him  in  store,  as  God  has  prospered  him. 
I  Cor.  16:  2. 

Q.  What  promise  is  given  to  those  who  consider  the 
poor? 

13.  Blessed  is  he  that  considereth  the  poor;  the 
Lord  will  deliver  him  in  time  of  trouble.    Psalm  41  :  i. 

Q.  What  measure  shall  be  given  to  those  who  give 
liberally  ? 

14.  Give  and  it  shall  be  given  unto  you;  good  meas- 
ure, pressed  down,  and  shaken  together,  and  running 


128 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


over,  shall  men  give  into  your  bosom.  For  with  the 
same  measure  that  ye  mete  withal,  it  shall  be  measured 
to  you  again.    Luke  6:  38. 

Q.    What  does  Isaiah  say  of  liberal  people? 

No.  15.  The  liberal  deviseth  liberal  things,  and  by 
liberal  things  shall  he  stand.    Isaiah  32  :  8. 

Q.    What  command  does  God  give  about  the  poor? 

No.  16.  Thou  shalt  open  thy  hand  wide  unto  thy 
brother,  to  thy  poor,  and  to  thy  needy  in  thy  land. 
Deut.  15:  II. 

Q.    How  should  we  treat  those  who  ask  for  favors? 

No,  17.  Give  to  him  that  asketh  thee,  and  from  him 
that  would  borrow  of  thee,  turn  not  thou  away.  Matt. 
5 :  42. 

Q.    What  about  the  first  fruits? 

No.  18,  The  first  of  the  first  fruits  of  thy  land  thou 
shalt  bring  into  the  house  of  the  Lord  thy  God.  Ex- 
23:  19- 

Q.    Give  another  promise  about  liberal  souls. 

No.  19.  The  liberal  soul  shall  be  made  fat;  and  he 
that  watereth  shall  be  watered  also  himself.    Prov.  11:25. 

Q.    What  is  God's  greatest  gift  to  man  ? 

No.  20.  God  so  loved  the  world  that  He  gave  His 
only  begotten  Son,  that  whosoever  believeth  on  Him 
should  not  perish,  but  have  everlasting  life.    John  3:  16. 

Q.    Did  we  deserve  this? 

JNo.  21.  While  we  were  yet  sinners  Christ  died  for 
us.    Rom.  5  :  8. 

Q.    What  should  we  say  for  this  ? 

No.  22.  Thanks  be  unto  God  for  His  unspeakable 
gift.    II  Cor.  9:  15. — Mrs.  Alice  W.  Knox, 

I 


f 

CUT  LINES,  m 


Missionaries. 

I     What  is  meant  by  "Missionary?" 
Who  is  a  Home  Missionary? 
A  Foreign  Missionary? 

2.  Who  was  the  first  Missionary?    (John  3  :  17.)  Who 

sent  him?  John  5:  36.  Why?  John  3:  17. 
From  what  kind  of  a  home?    John  6:  38. 

3.  Who  were  the  first  Foreign  Missionaries  after  Christ 

ascended?    Acts  13:2. 

To  what  countries  did  Paul  go?    (Locate  on 

blackboard  map  or  other  map.) 
Who  sent  Paul  and  Barnabas?     Acts  13:  4. 

What  did  they  do  on  their  journeys  ?  Acts  13: 

5;  Acts  14:  I,  3,  7,  21,  etc.;  I  Con  2:  2. 
What  book  of  the  Bible  tells  of  the  travels  and 

labors  of  Paul  and  Peter  and  the  other  early 

missionaries  ? 
Do  you  think  Paul  was  ever  sorry  that  he  became 

a  missionary?    Gal.  6:9.    II  Tim.  4:  6-8. 

4.  What  were  the  general  directions  that  Jesus  left 

about  Missionary  work  ?  Matt.  28:  18-20.  What 
about  Home  Missions?    Matt.  lO:  1-5-6;  Acts 
1 :  8.    What  about  Foreign  Missions  ?    Matt.  1 3 
38.    Acts  I  :  8. 

5.  Is  there  still  need  of  Missionaries  in  the  world  ?  An 

swer,  if  possible,  by  showing  children  a  map  of  the 
whole  earth  with  the  unevangelized  portions  dark 
ened.    It  is  estimated  that  seven  hundred  millions 
of  people  never  heard  of  Jesus;  two  hundred  mill- 


130 


CHILDREN '  S  MEE  TINGS. 


ions  in  Africa  alone;  and  ''a  million  a  month  in 
China  are  dying  without  a  God." 
6,    What  can  we  do? 

Give  prayer,  money,  and.  perhaps,  ourselves. — Mrs. 

Annie  Downic^  Ncllore,  India, 


Idols.* 

Text  J  "Little  Children  keep  yourselves  from  idols.'*   I  John  5:  21. 

(Read  in  concert  Ps.  115  :  4-8.) 
What  are  idols  ? 
How  are  they  worshiped  ? 
What  is  the  effect  on  the  worshipers  } 
Do  any  besides  heathen  worship  idols  ? 
What  kind  ? 

I  ntemperance.    Phil.  4:  5. 

D  eceitfulness  of  riches.    Matt.  13:  22. 

O  Id  habits  and  besetting  sins.    Heb.  12:  I. 

li  ove  of  the  world  and  its  pleasures.    I  John 

2:15.    II  Tim.  3:  4  (last  clause). 
S  elf.    II  Tim.  3  :  2  (first  clause). 

Am  I  serving  idols  ? 

"The  dearest  idol  I  have  known, 
Whatever  that  idol  be. 
Help  me  to  tear  it  from  thy  throne, 
And  worship  only  Thee." 


*It  would  be  interesting  to  have  a  heathen  idol,  or  a  picture  of  one,  to  show 
the  children.  Or  this  subject,  developed  in  a  different  way,  would  make  an  eX' 
cellent  missionary  lesson. 


OUTLINES, 


131 


Consider  the  Lilies. 

Matt.  G:  28-33. 

1.  Exhibit  a  lily,  or  other  flower.  Let  it  be  as 
bright  and  pretty  as  possible.  A  plant  in  bloom  would 
be  better  than  a  single  blossom,  as  showing  how  flowers 
grow. 

2.  Ask  the  children  to  watch  carefully  as  you 
examine  it.  Show  them  how  wonderfully  it  is  made; 
how  perfect  and  beautiful  in  every  part;  not  one  little 
thing  forgotten. 

3.  yii/^',  (a)  who  made  it?  (b)  whether  or  not  God 
cares  for  the  flowers  He  makes  ?  (c)  what  God  has  made 
that  is  worth  more  than  flowers?  (d)  what,  of  all  the 
things  God  has  made,  He  cares  most  for? 

4.  Teach  that  tfie  flowers  should  lead  us  to  trust 
God.  If  he  thinks  of  them,  how  sure  we  should  feel  that 
He  will  never  forgef  us,  in  whom  He  has  put  a  spirit 
that  can  praise  Him,  and  that  can  never  die. — Mary  G. 
Burdette, 


Wheat  and  Chaff. 

1.  If  possible  secure  several  heads  of*  wheat,  from 
one  of  which  remove  the  kernels.  (If  the  heads  cannot 
be  obtained  take  some  wheat,  and  show  by  a  picture  how 
it  grows,  modifying  the  lesson  to  suit  the  circumstances.) 

2.  Ask  (a.)  How  many  heads  of  wheat  you  have? 
(b.)    If  it  is  all  good  wheat. 


132 


CHILDREN  \S  MEE  TINGS. 


3.  Examine  (a)  one  head  showing  the  full  ripe  ker- 
nels ;  {h.)  another  showing  that  there  is  no  grain,  only 
husks. 

4.  Beat  the  heads  so  that  the  grain  falls  out.  Lay 
the  grain  in  one  place,  the  chaff  in  another. 

5.  Ask  which  is  good?  Gather  up  the  good  and 
place  it  carefully  in  a  box. 

6.  Ask  what  the  chaff  is  good  for?  Throw  it  away 
— into  the  fire,  if  there  is  one  near. 

7.  Teach  that  God  will  thus  separate  the  good  from 
the  bad.  The  good  He  will  save  in  heaven — the  wicked 
He  will  cast  away. 

(If  wheat  cannot  be  obtained,  substitute  any  seeds 
enclosed  in  husks.) — Mary  G.  Biirdette. 


2.    Conditions  of  healthy  growth. 

Light  from  the  "Sun  of  Righteousness."   Ps.  4: 

6;  27;  I ;  36:  9;  90:  8;  Mai.  4:  2;  John  i  :  9^ 

8:  12;  I  John  i  :  5-7. 
Pure  Atmosphere.     Ps.   i:  i;   I  Cor.  5:  11; 

H  Cor.  6:  17;  Heb.  lO:  25  ;  12:  i. 
Proper  Nourishment.    John  6:  63-68;  Acts  17: 

1 1 ;  I  Peter  2:2. 


The  Christian— A  Tree. 


I.  Planted. 


Where?    Ps.  i:  3.    Luke  13:  6. 


OUTLINES. 


133 


Companionship  and  shelter  of  other  trees.  Eph. 

6:2,  Heb.  12:  i  ,  James  5  .  16. 
Pruning  and  purging.    John  15:  2,  Heb.  10:  11. 

1 2 :  6-7. 

3.  Is  known  by  its  fruits.    Matt.  7:  16-20. 

4.  Cannot  bring  forth  evil  fruit.    Matt.  7:  17-18. 

5.  Fruit  depends  on ''inner "  Hfe.    Luke  13:  6-9;  Eph. 

3:  17;  Col.  2:  7. 

6.  Fruitless  trees  are  hewn  down.    Matt.  3:  10;  7:  19. 

J,  C,  C. 


The  Telephone. 

Its  use. — To  enable  people  a  long  distance  apart,  to 
speak  with  each  other  as  if  they  were  in  the  same  room. 

New  invention — First  used  (show  picture  or  describe) 
A.  D.  1876.  The  Heavenly  Telephone  not  new.  Used 
4000  B.  C. 

I.  We  speak  to  God  by  prayer. 

1.  The  sound  is  heard  at  the  same  instant.    Is.  65  : 

24. 

2.  We  do  not  need  to  ''ring  the  bell"  to  call  Gods  at- 
tention.   Ps.  34:  15. 

3.  We  can  speak  directly  to  Him  without  any  "cen- 
tral  office  "  (Priest,  Holy  Virgin,  etc.) 

4.  This  telephone  never  gets  out  of  order  at  God's 
end. 

II.  God  speaks  to  us  through  our  conscience,  by  His 

word  and  His  spirit. 
I.    We  sometimes  need  to  stop  our  ears  to  the  noise 


13^ 


CmLDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


of  the  outside  world  in  order  to  hear  the  still  small  voice 
within. 

2.  God  often  has  to  ring  the  bell "  to  call  our  atten- 
tion. Sometimes  He  has  to  send  great  trouble  or  sor- 
row, before  we  will  listen. 

3.  Our  end  of  the  telephone  often  gets  out  of  order. 
"Conscience  seared  with  a  hot  iron,"    I  Tim.  4:  2. 

4.  Great  need  of  keeping  our  consciences  pure  and 
sensitive. 

^11.    Let  us  use  this  telephone  to-day. 

1.  What  does  God  say  to  you?  To  give  yourself 
to  him  ;  to  live  a  better  Christian  life:  to  overcome  bad 
habits,  etc. 

2.  What  GO  you  want  to  ask  him  for  most  of  alP 
Let  each  one  give  an  answer;  then  have  all  kneel  down, 
and  each  one  pray  for  just  the  one  thing  he  desires. — N, 


Prohibition.* 

le    Explain  what    Prohibition   means  as  applied  to  in- 
toxicating liquors. 
2.    Answer  the  question,    Why  do  people  want  a  law 
that  will  prevent  the  making  or  selling  of  in- 
toxicating liquors  ? 

(a.)  God  says  it  is  not  good  for  people  to 
drink  such  things.  Is.  5:11,  Prov. 
:>3:  29-32. 


"■We  take  pleasure  in  referring  to  Mrs.  Foster  s  exellent  book,  "Constitutional 
Amendment  Manual,"  in  connection  with  this  subject  and  the  lesson.  Published 
by  National  Temperance  Society  and  Publication  House,  58  Reade  St.,  New  York 


OUTLINES, 


135 


(b.)  We  know  by  observation  that  it  is  not 
good  for  families^  that  one  should  drink, 
(Leader  picture  the  evils  and  sorrows  of 
drunkard*s  home.  Mother  in  sorrow. 
Children  in  want  and  shame.) 

(c.)  Also  that  it  is  not  good  for  the  individual. 
(Leader  tell  the  story  all  too  common, 
of  a  good,  rich,  kind  man,  made  bad, 
poor,  cruel,  by  strong  drink.) 

3.  A  happy  country  is  one  where  all  the  people  are 

educated  and  well,  in  body  and  mind  and  spirit. 
Alcohol  affects 

(a.)  Body.  Illustrate  by  any  sickness  caused 
by  alcohol.    "  Heart  disease,"  etc. 

(b.)  Mind.  Tell  about  delirium  tremens.  Illus- 
trate by  showing  how  the  white  of  an 
egg  (something  like  substance  of  brain) 
is  hardened  in  a  moment  by  alcohol 
Break  the  white  of  an  egg  into  alcohol 
before  class, 

(c.)  The  soul  God  says  no  drunkard  shall 
inherit  the  kingdom  of  God.  I  Con 
6 :  10. 

4.  Who  make  up  the  country?    The  families  and  peo- 

ple. Then  a  law  that  is  good  for  the  family,  and 
the  individual,  ought  to  be  the  law  of  the  country, 

5.  Moreover  the  law  of  a  Nation  ought  to  be  like  God  s 

law.    Ps.  144:  15, 

6.  Why  does  not  every  one  want  such  a  law  ?  Some 

do  not  know,  some  do  not  care,  some  are  willing 


136 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


God's  law  should  be  broken  and  souls  ruined  if 
they  can  make  money. 
7.  If  all  little  children  should  know  and  keep  God's 
laws,  in  a  little  while  all  the  world  would  be  good 
and  happy,  and  God's  Kingdom  would  come/'  as 
we  pray. — Mrs,  J.  E.  Foster, 


A  Ladder  to  Ruin. 


Prof,  C.  W.  Jerome. 


OUTLWES. 


137 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

OUTLINES. 

Fight  the  Good  Fight. 

Intiroductory, — Describe  circumstances  of  a  war;  the 

armies,  captains,  camps,  battles,  etc. 
Heads  of  the  Sermon, 

1 .  There  s  a  fight  going  on,  here  and  now.  (Illustrate.) 

2.  We  are  all  in  it.  (The  ''good"  fight,  or  a  bad 
one.) 

3.  There  are  two  sets  of  recruiting  places.  (Saloons, 
sometimes  street  corners,  outsides  of  churches,  etc. ;  and 
churches,  Sunday-schools,  etc.) 

4.  Books  of  instruction.    (Bad  books;  Bible.) 

5.  If  we  are  fighting  on  the  right  side  our  Captain  is 
always  near  us. 

6.  God's  soldiers  are  all  sure  of  victory  here,  and 
promotion,  by  and  by 

7.  Who  wants  to  enlist  ? 

Mrs.  Emily  Huntington  Miller. 


A  Temperance  Lesson, 

My  little  people,  I  want  each  of  you  to  be  still  as  a 
mouse.    I  am  going  to  tell  you  about  two  men;  one  was 


CHILD  RE  A  'J  MEEl^ING^. 


good  and  the  other  bad.  You  have  often  heard  about 
them  both,  but  I  will  not  tell  their  names.  That,  you 
may  do.  When  I  am  done  I  am  going  to  see  if  you  have 
guessed  their  names,  for  you  know  them  as  vv^ell  as  I  do. 

Well,  in  the  first  place,  there  was  ci.^e  a  man  so  tall 
he  could  not  have  walked  in  at  that  high  door  yonder.  It 
says  in  a  book  about  him  that  *'his  height  was  six  cubits 
and  a  span,"  This  man  wore  a  queer  brass  hat  on  his 
head.  I  don't  see  how  he  could,  for  it  must  have  been 
very  heavy;  but  then  it  shone  brightly  in  the  sun,  and 
looked  Y^ry  handsome,  and  it  kept  him  from  being  hit  in 
the  head  when  he  went  out  to  fight — for  he  was  a  great 
soldier.  He  had  a  curious  coat,  not  a  bit  like  any  you 
have  seen,  but  made  of  brass — buttons  and  all;  and  he 
had  brass  leggings  fastened  around  his  knees.  In  his 
hand  he  carried  a  big,  long  spear.  The  book  says  it  was 
eighteen  feet  long.  So,  if  three  of  the  tallest  men  you 
know  stood  one  above  another,  they  would  only  be  as 
high  as  this  great,  bad  fighter's  sword  was  long.  Of 
course  he  was  very  strong,  or  he  would  have  been  bent 
down  to  the  ground  by  all  these  heavy  things. 

Besides  all  these,  he  had  a  man — not  tall  like  a  tree, 
as  he  was,  but  about  as  tall  as  an  ordinary  man — who 
went  on  ahead  of  him  with  a  shield,  like  a  big  tea-tray, 
which  he  held  up  to  prevent  any  arrows  striking  his 
master.  (They  did  not  have  guns  and  bullets  in  those 
days,  but  fought  with  spears,  and  bows  and  arrows.) 

Now,  there  was  an  army  over  on  this  side  (the  right 
hand)  made  up  of  good  men,  and  they  were  goh)g  to  fight 
another  army  over  here  (the  left  hand)  made  up  of  bad 
men  :  and  this  great,  strange  fighter  1  have  told  you 


OUTLINES, 


139 


about,  belonged  to  the  army  of  bad  men.  And  one 
morning  he  came  out  in  front  of  the  armies  and  said : 

"  Why  should  all  these  men  fight  with  each  other? 
Let  those  on  the  right  side  choose  a  man,  and  he  and  I 
will  fight,  and  if  he  can  beat  me,  then  all  of  us  men  over* 
here  will  be  servants  of  you  men  over  there  !  "  But  the 
whole  army  of  good  men  was  afraid  of  the  big  man,  and 
no  one  of  them  dared  to  go  out  against  him.  They  were 
real  cowards  I  think. 

But  while  they  were  wondering  what  to  do,  a  "ruddy*"^ 
boy  from  the  country  came  to  see  his  three  big  brothers 
who  were  soldiers  on  the  right  side.  His  father  had  sent 
him  to  see  how  they  were  getting  along,  and  he  had 
brought  them  from  the  farm  some  nice,  fresh  bread  and  a 
lot  of  popped  corn,  besides  rich,  fine  cheeses  as  a  present 
to  their  captai  i.  Well,  of  course  they  told  their  young 
brother  all  about  this  tall,  bad  man  that  nobody  dared 
to  fight,  and  he  saw  how  sorry  everybody  felt,  and  how 
puzzled  they  all  were.  He  was  a  very  bright,  wide-awake 
boy,  and  what  do  you  think  he  said  ?  Who  is  this  big, 
bad  man  that  dares  to  speak  in  this  way  to  the  army  of 
the  living  God?  I  am  not  afraid  of  him,  and  I  will  go 
out  against  him  all  alone." 

You  may  be  sure  the  big  brothers  did  not  like  this^ 
for  it  was  a  pretty  strong  hint  to  them  that  they  were  a 
pack  of  cowards.    So  they  answered  him  this  way 

"  Who  are  you  ?  Nothing  but  a  boy.  What  can  you 
do  ?  Go  back  and  take  care  of  those  few  sheep  you  left 
behind  you  on  the  farm  !"  But  he  did  not  get  vexed  or 
discouraged     He  did  not  mind  their  words  a  bit,  but 


*ISam  1?,  12. 


140 


CHILDREirS  MEETINGS. 


went  right  to  the  king  and  told  him  that  he  was  not 
afraid  to  fight  the  tall  man.  When  the  king  answered 
that  he  thought  he  was  too  young,  the  boy  told  him  how 
he  had  killed  a  lion  and  a  bear  that  was  trying  to  eat  up 
a  lamb  out  of  a  flock  that  was  under  his  care;  and  he 
persuaded  (coaxed)  the  king  to  let  him  try,  For,"  he 
said,  "  the  Lord  that  delivered  me  out  of  the  paw  of  the 
lion  and  the  paw  of  the  bear,  can  surely  save  me  out  of 
the  hand  of  this  great,  bragging  soldier." 

So  the  king  finally  said  he  might  go,  and  offered  him 
his  own  sword,  and  a  hat  and  coat  of  brass,  such  as  the 
tall  man  wore.  Bui  the  boy  thanked  him,  and  said  he 
would  rather  not  wear  them  for  they  did  not  fit.  So  he 
went  off  by  himself  to  a  brook  near  by,  and  picked  out 
five  smooth,  round  stones,  put  them  in  his  pocket,  and 
holding  his  sling  tightly  in  his  hand,  he  walked  quietly 
toward  the  tall  man  who  had  dared  anybody  to  fight 
against  him,  Down  they  came,  toward  the  brave  boy> 
the  ugly  giant,  and  his  servant  carrying  the  big  brass  tea- 
tray  that  they  call  a  shield.  And  the  giant  looked  at  the 
boy  as  if  he  did  not  think  him  worth  speaking  to,  and 
much  less  worth  striking  with  his  great  sword.  He 
growled  like  a  great  lion,  and  this  is  what  he  said  • 

"Come  unto  me  and  I  will  give  thy  flesh  unto  the 
fov/ls  of  the  air  and  unto  the  beasts  of  the  field  ! "  But 
the  boy  looked  away  up  into  his  cross  face  and  answered* 
Thou  comest  to  me  with  a  sword  and  with  a  spear 
and  with  a  shield,  but  I  am  come  to  thee  in  the  name  ot 
the  Lord  God,"* 

Then  the  giant  rushed  toward  the  boy,  and  the  boy 
ran  to  meet  him,  and  put  a  stone  in  the  sling  and  threw 


OUTLINES.  141 


it  with  all  his  might  and  hit  the  giant.  Where  did  he  hit 
him,  boys  ?  Put  up  your  finger  against  the  place  where 
he  hit  and  killed  the  old  giant.  That's  right ;  the  stone 
went  right  through  his  forehead.  Now,  what  was  the- 
giant's  name,  girls  ?  Goliath.  I  knew  you  could  tell. 
And  now,  all  together,  tell  me  this  brave  boy  s  name  ? 
Right  ;  it  was  David. 

Now,  did. you  know  that  old  Goliath  is  not  dead? 
You  go  home  and  tell  your  father  I  said  the  old  giant  is 
living  in  this  very  town.  Have  not  you  seen  pictures  of 
him,  sitting  astride  a  beer  barrel,  over  the  door  of  a 
saloon  ?  I  have.  They  say  his  name  is  Gambrinus,  bnt 
I  say  it s  old  King  Alcohol.  What  is  his  name?  Did 
you  ever  see  a  drunkard  ?  Hold  up  your  hands,  all  who 
ever  did.  What  are  the  drinks  that  make  folks  drunk  ? 
Let's  see  how  many  we  can  count  up  on  our  fingers. 
Now,  all  these  have  old  King  Alcohol  in  them,  and  that's 
what  makes  men  who  drink  them  "  crazy  on  purpose,"  as 
I  once  heard  a  boy  call  it.  Old  Goliath — I  mean  King 
Alcohol — thinks  he  is  very  strong,  and  boasts  that  no- 
body can  conquer  him,  but  I'll  tell  you  what  I  believe: 
If  we  can  get  all  the  brave  little  Davids  who  are  here 
to-day,  and  all  the  little  Davids  in  the  world,  to  go  out 
against  him,  they  can  kill  hirh  with  stones.  I  want  each 
of  you  to  carry  five  stones,  just  as  the  boy  in  the  Bible 
did,  and  I  want  you  to  go  as  he  did,  in  the  name  of  the 
living  God.  Here,  look  at  my  fingers  while  I  name  these 
stones,  so  you  can  not  forget  them :  On  my  thumb  I 
put  for  the  first  stone,  this  promise  :  * 


*  [The  signing  of  the  pledge,  or  the  taking  of  any  vow,  is  a  very  solemn 
thing,  and  the  cases  are  very  exceptional  indeed  where  chi  dren  should  be  asked 


4 


142  CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 

1.  I  will  not  drink  anything  that  makes  men  drunk, 

2.  I  will  not  smoke  tobacco. 

3.  I  will  not  chew  tobacco- 

4.  I  will  not  swear, 

5.  I  will  try  to  persuade  other  people  not  to  do  any 
of  these  things. 

Now,  all  together,  what  is  tne  first?  The  second? 
Third  ?  etc.  Perhaps  your  big  brothers  will  tell  you  that 
you  are  not  strong  enough  to  fight  old  King  Alcohol,  but 
don't  you  listen  to  them.  They  have  not  fought  very 
bravely  themselves.  Wait  till  they  see  you  try  the  five 
stones  on  him.  I  put  in  tobacco  because  that  so  often 
leads  to  strong  drink.  If  any  one  ever  asks  you  to  take 
a  drink  or  a  smoke,  just  bring  out  one  of  your  pebbles, 
"  I  will  not  drink,"  or  "  I  will  not  smoke, "  and  sling  it 
straight  at  him ;  and  bye-and-bye,  when  we  get  all  our 
young  Davids  to  throwing  these  stones,  we  shall  see  old 
Goliath- Alcohol  fall  down  dead  some  day,  right  here  in 
America,  where  he  has  so  long  defied  the  armies  of  the 
living  God. 

Leader  may  close  with  an  experiment:  Pour  some 
water  into  a  glass ;  taste  it,  call  it  good.  Dip  a  lighted 
match  into  it :  it  is  extinguished.  Try  the  same  with 
tea,  coffee,  lemonade,  if  convenient.  Now  pour  from  a 
disreputable  looking  black  bottle  a  teaspoonful  of  alcohol 
(with  a  sprinkle  of  salt  or  camphor  in  it  to  give  color  to 
the  flame)  into  the  foot  of  an  upturned  goblet  or  glass. 

to  take  or  sign  any  pledge,  except  after  days  or  weeks  of  serious  thought  and 
prayer,  and  after  the  leader  is  certain  that  the  matter  has  been  considered  at  the 
homes  of  all  the  children,  We  take  it  for  granted  that  the  gifted  author  would  not 
actually  present  the  pledge  in  a  miscellaneous  children's  meeting,  unless  it  be 
that  they  may  take  it  home  with  them  for  deliberate  consideratiou  and  action.— 
Eds.] 


OUTLINES. 


143 


Complain  of  its  smell — don't  dare  to  taste  it."  Try  the 
lighted  match,  and  it  burns  up  with  a  wicked,  red  flame. 
Leader  may  add  the  familiar  egg  illustration,  see  page  V^h 
if  thought  best. — Frances  E,  Wtllard, 


Prayer.* 

1.  What  is  prayer  ? 

Talking  to  God.    Ex.33:  ii. 
Telling  Jesus.    Matt,  14:  12. 
Speaking  in  the  heart.      I  Sam.  i  :  13. 

2.  How  to  pray? 

With  all  the  heart.    Jer.  29:  12,  13. 
In  the  name  of  Jesus.    John  14:  13. 
According  to  God's  will.    I  John  5  :  14. 
Earnestly.    James  5 :  17.    Boldly.    Heb.  4:  16, 
Unhurriedly.    Matt.  6:  6.    -Luke  6:  12. 
In  faith.    James  i  :  6. 

Depending  upon  the  help  of  the  Holy  Spirit. 
Jude  20.    Rom.  8  :  26. 

3.  When  to  pray? 

In  the  morning.    Ps.  5:3. 

Morning,  noon  and  evening.    Dan.  6:  10. 

In  time  of  trouble.    Ps.  107:  13. 

'^This  lesson  may  be  given,  a  very  little  at  a  time,  in  connection  with  children'^ 
prayer  meetings.  Instructions  to  children  about  prayer  should  be  very  plain. 
Teach  them  always  to  assume  a  reverent  attitude,  always  to  keep  the  eyes  closed, 
anJ  always  to  try  to  think  about  nothing  but  the  words  of  prayer  that  are  being 
spoken.  Teach  them  the  meaning  of  the  names  by  which  we  address  God,  an<i 
the  meaning  of  *' Amen.""  Sentence  prayers— either  the  Leader  praying  and  the 
children  repeating  sentence  by  sentence,  or  the  children  in  turn  uttering  a  simpL? 
confession  or  petition  only  a  sentence  long— are  very  helpful.  Teach — especially 
— directness,  definiteness,  earnestness,  ard  faith. 


144 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS 


Always,     Eph.   6:    i8.     Without   ceasing.  I 
Thess.  5  :  17. 

4.  Some  things  that  should  be  in  our  prayers. 

Thanksgiving  and  praise.    Ps.  34:  i;  Ps.  117. 

Confession.    Dan.  9:4.    I  John  i  :  9. 

Petition.    Asking  for  what  we  want.    Phil.  4:  6. 

5.  The  conditions  of  prayer  answered. 

Faith.    Heb.  1 1  :  6.    Obedience.    1  John  3:  22. 
Abiding  in  Christ.    John  15:  7. 
Not  regarding  iniquity  in  our  heart.    Ps.  66:  18 
Asking  '*if  it  be  God  s  will."    Luke  22:  42. 

6.  God  sometimes  answers,  "Yes;"  sometimes,  No.* 

(Deut.  3 :  26.)  But  His  way  is  always  best. 
(Illustrate  by  child  crying  to  have  candle  given 
to  it,  etc.) 


A  Treasure  Box. 

Come  now  and  let  us  reason  together,  saith  the  Lord,  though  your  sins  be  as 
scarlet,  they  shall  be  as  white  as  snow,  though  ihey  be  red  liko  crimson  they  shall 
be  as  wool.   Is.  1  *  18, 

Before  reading  text,  picture  to  the  imagination  of  the 
children  a  wonderful  box,  with  several  parts,  each  filled 
with  something  valuable.  A  top  part,  middle  part,  and 
bottom  part.  Describe  the  excitement  of  opening,  the 
knowledge  that  it  is  a  gift  of  a  dear  friend,  etc. 

Now  read  the  text,  pausing  at  the  words,  "  Come," 
"Now,"  Let,'  "Snow,"  and  "Wool."  Show  how  the 
text — call  it  Gods  Treasu.e  Box — represents  a  box; 
God's  gift,  its  divisions,  etc.  Open  the  first  part,  and 
find  an  invitation.    It  is  filled  with  the  word,  "Come.*' 


OUTLINES 


145 


Compare  this  with  other  invitations.  When  to  come  ? 
^'Nowl'  Talk  about  this  being  God's  time.  But  sinners 
say,  "Sometime,"  "Not  now,"  etc.  Then  ask  if  we  had 
better  open  the  middle  part.  This  contains  a  request. 
Read  from  the  Bible  what  it  is,  "Let  us  reason  together, 
saith  the  Lord."  All  recite.  Dwell  on  who  it  is  that 
wants  us  to  reason  with  him.  Draw  a  word  picture  of 
how  people  act  when  they  have  something  of  importance 
to  talk  about,  especially  if  the  one  they  are  talking  with 
knows  a  great  deal  more  than  they  do. 

Awaken  in  the  mind  by  questions  what  God  talks  to 
us  now  about.  Suggest  our  need  of  His  help  in  all 
things,  what  He  has  done  for  us,  what  we  are  doing  for 
Him,  etc. 

Find  out  how  many  have  a  desire  to  look  at  the  bot- 
tom part  of  box.  Show  how  it  contains  the  best  of  all. 
Two  promises.  Read,  first,  "  Though  your  sins."  Hold 
up  the  word  Second  promise,  "Though  they  be 

red."  Call  attention  to  this,  another  one  of  God's 
^^shallsr  Have  all  recite.  Show  difference  of  colors 
mentioned  by  a  piece  of  scarlet  cloth,  and  a  bit  of  white 
cloth,  or  a  tuft  of  white  wool.  Tell  how  difficult — almost 
impossible — it  is  to  make  scarlet  cloth  white.  Draw  out 
from  the  children  what  their  idea  of  scarlet  sin  is.  No 
human  power  can  bleach  them  out,  only  God  can  do  any- 
thing with  them.  Give  some  striking  illustration  of  one 
who  kept  his  scarlet  sins,  and  compare  with  another  who 
took  his  to  God.  Dwell  on  the  need  of  cleansing.  God 
knew  this  need  when  he  put  in  the  box,  or  text,  these 
two  precious  promises.  Draw  a  picture  of  the  result  it 
we  had  no  such  promises. 

Take  the  contents  of  box  or  text  and  seek  to 


146 


CHILDREJSrS  MEETINGS, 


arouse  the  faith  that  takes  hold  on  salvation.  Show 
God's  willingness  and  our  faith. 

The  blackboard  may  be  used  as  below;  or  three 
pieces  of  white  paper  appropriately  lettered,  may  repre- 
sent each  one  of  the  divisions  of  the  Treasure  Box- 
Write  on  the  top  one,  Invitation.  Middle  one,  Request. 
Bottom  one,  Two  Promises.  Turn  them  back  as  you 
wish  to  talk  about  them.  When  papers  are  used,  the 
words,  Invitation,  Request,  and  Two  Promises,  will  be 
left  out  of  the  divisions. — Mrs.  A.  P.  Graves. 


liivitatioiT 
'Come  No  w  " 

^           -  -       ^  '        1  ' 

REQUEST 

let L/s  r&a son  together 
sa  J  til  tire  Lord. 

Two  Promises 

/  Though  \iour  sins  he  d  s 
scdr/et  they  shall  be  as  white 
OS  sn  o  w  ^  :  2  Though thej/ 

do  red  /(t(e  cr)'mson^  hiej- 

shah  be  OS  wooL 

I 

OUTLINES 


147 


Temperance  Lesson. 

Which  Way  ?— or,  How  to  Grow. 

"  Boys  and  girls,  you  all  know  an  acorn  when  you  see 
it (sketching  an  acorn  with  twig  and  leaf  about  twenty 
times  the  natural  size,  that  all  might  see,) 
"What  tree  is  it  the  seed  of?" 
"An  oak;' 

"  Of  the  oak — yes.  This  is  an  acorn 
as  it  looks  when  growing  on  the  tree. 
It  doesn't  always  stay  there.  What 
becomes  of  it  ? " 

"Falls  on  the  ground." 
"And  what  then?" 
"  Grows." 

"Ah,  that's  what  we  want  to  talk  about."  (Erase  the 
first  acorn  and  sketch  another  with  a  split  in  the  shell 
and  a  little  shoot  springing  from 
the  germ.)  "  It  grows,  it  must 
grow,  because  there  is  life  wrap- 
ped up  in  the  shell  that  must 
become  something  more  than  it 
is.  It  will  grow  up  into  the  air 
and  sunshine  and  be  strong,  but  it  must  have  something 
to  help  it  grow.    What  does  it  need  !  " 

"  Roots." 

"Yes."  (Now  make  the  downward  root  with  many 
spreading  rootlets.)  "These  all  fasten  in  the  ground, 
and  are  not  only  strong  feet  for  the  young  oak  to  stand 
upon,  but  so  many  mouths  to  drink  with.  What  does 
the  little  tree  drink  ?  " 


148 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


"  Water.    "  Water  of  life." 

"  Ah,  you  are  getting  the  moral  before  I  am  ready  for 
itc  Yes,  water  is  life  to  every  plant  and  tree.  Now, 
boys  and  girls,  you  are  very  much  like  acorns.  You  are 
planted  in  an  earthly  nature,  but  you  are  each  a  heavenly 
seed  of  more  value  than  all  the  acorns  that  ever  grew. 
God  planted  you,  and  He  has  a  glorious  plan  of  growth 
for  you,  if  you  will  help  Him  to  carry  it  out.  You  know 
how  a  disease  attacks  some  plants,  like  the  rot  in  the 
potato.  Just  such  a  disease  is  in  our  earthly  nature,  and 
tries  to  blacken  and  kill  the  heavenly  seed,  and  prevent 
it  from  getting  out  of  the  ground.  It  cannot  kill  the 
heavenly  seed  outright,  but  it  can  keep  it  from  growing, 
and  place  it  in  great  danger  as  to  its  future.  You  know 
how  the  beautiful  rain  comes  down  upon  the  grass  and 
sinks  through  the  earth  where  all  these  thirsty  little  root- 
lets are  crying  for  a  drink.  They  would  never,  never, 
like  to  have,  instead  of  the  rain,  some  poison  poured  out 
for  them,  would  they?  It  would  not  only  injure  the 
root,  but  destroy  the  shoot,  so  that  it  could  never  get 
above  ground.  Now,  I  am  sorry  to  say  that  this  earthly 
nature  gets  so  bad  sometimes  that  those  who  have  it 
are  quite  willing  to  have  it  worse,  so  that  they  turn  away 
from  the  pure  water  of  life  that  the  Lord  gives  freely  to 
everybody,  and  drink  in  a  poison  that  kills.    What  is  it  ? 

"  Liquor."—"  Rum."^" Alcohol." 

"Yes,  these  are  bad  enough,  but  there  are  other 
habits  quite  as  bad,  and  we  put  them  all  together  and 
call  it  sin.  It  doesn't  seem  possible  that  any  to-day 
can  choose  poison  instead  of  water,  pure,  living  water, 
does  it  ?    And  yet  there  are  thousands  who  are  content 


OUTLINES. 


149 


to  live  in  the  dark  and  filth  of  their  earthly  nature  when 
they  might  be  growing  into  a  stately  and  beautiful  life. 
The  Bible  says  of  the  good  man,  '  He  shall  be  like  a  tree 
planted  by  the  rivers  of  water,  that  bringeth  forth  his 
fruit  in  his  season;  his  leaf  also  shall  not  wither,  and 
whatsoever  he  doeth  shall  prosper.' " 

"What  if,  while  this  oak  is  a  little  growing  twig, 
some  one  should  step  on  it  and  almost  break  it — like 
this — "  (here  make  a  bend  in  the  little  shoot  from  the 
acorn)  *^will  it  make  any  difference  with  the  tree  when  it 
is  grown  ?" 

"Yes."  "No." 

"  I  find  you  do  not  agree,  but  you  are  both  right. 
Sometimes  nature  helps  the  little  plant  to  outgrow  the 
hurt,  and  sometimes  it  is  never  outgrown,  for  you  have 
all  seen  crooked  trees.  They  were  all  bent  when  they 
were  young.  Beware  of  bad  habits,  boys.  I  want  you 
to  be  noble  and  upright  trees  of  the  Lord's  planting. 

"And  one  word  here  to  a  few  for  whom  I  have  a 
special  interest.  There  are  boys  and  girls  here  who  have 
weights  upon  them.  Perhaps  intemperance  has  made 
your  home  a  ruin,  and  you  are  ready  to  say,  ^  I  shall 
never  be  anybody — there's  no  use  in  trying!'  Just  look 
at  this.  (Here  sketch  a  stone  on  the  surface  of  the 
ground  just  over  the  acorn.)  "Somebody 
has  laid  a  stone  right  over  the  spot 
where  the  acorn  was  trying  to  grow.  It 
sends  its  little  leafy  shoot  up  to  seek 
the  air  and  sunshine,  and  bumps  its  head 
against  a  stone  !  What  can  it  do  ?  " 
"Grow  till  it  gets  out." 


150 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


Yes,  it  can  do  that,  if  it  will  only  try  Plants  always 
do  try;  it  is  only  people  who  give  up.  It  will  feel  its 
way  along  under  this  stone  until  it  comes  to  its  chance, 
then  up  it  comes  !  Have  the  courage  of  this  little  acorn, 
boys  and  girls,  and  nothing  shall  be  impossible  to  you." — 
Mary  A,  Lathbury. 


Five  Fingers  Pointing  to  Christ. 

Types  of  Old  Testament  like  index  fingers.  Draw 
on  board  as  below.    So  arrange  that  after  all  the  hands 
.  are  drawn  the  cross  will  be  in  the  focus;  thus: 


OUTLINES. 


151 


Make  the  cross  very  small  for  sake  of  perspective. 
On  each  hand,  after  it  is  drawn,  make  a  rude  sketch  of 
the  symbol.    First  the  ark,  thus: 


Then  such  others  as  the  teacher  may  elect.  For 
example :  Isaac,  pascal  lamb,  brazen  serpent,  Jacob's 
ladder,  etc.,  etc. 

Give  a  short  description  of  each.  Quote  New  Tes- 
tament to  prove  the  points. — Rev,  David  R,  Breed. 


Witnessing. 

Text-  "Ye  are  my  witnesses,  saith  the  Lord."  Isa.  43 :  10. 

I.  What  is  it  to  witness? 

To  tell  what  one  knows,:  In  every  suit  at  law,  the 
decision  of  judge  or  jury  depends  upon  the  testimony  of 
the  witnesses.  Very  important  matters  are  often  de- 
cided by  the  testimony  of  one  oerson. 

II.  Who  can  be  witnesses  ? 

I.  One  who  knows  something  about  the  case 
Many  witnesses^in  law-suits  are  of  no  value^  because 
they  know  nothing  to  the  point.  Any  one.  who  knows 
about  Jesus  can  be  a  witness  for  Him.  A  Sunday 
school  missionary  was  riding  over  the  western  praiiies 
and  asked  a  little  boy  if  he  knew  about  Jesus  Christ. 


152 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


''No,  sir,"  said  the  boy,  "I  don't  think  he  lives  around  here.*  . 
The  missionary  witnessed  to  the  boy  about  Jesus.  To 
know  Christ  and  be  able  to  witness  for  Him,  we  must 
study  His  word,  and  let  Him  come  into  our  hearts. 

2.  One  who  has  a  good  character.  If  a  number  of 
men  testify  in  court  that  a  man  is  in  the  habit  of  telling 
lies,  that  man  is  not  allowed  as  a  witness.  So  a  person 
who  witnesses  for  Christ  only  on  Sunday  or  in  meeting, 
and  against  Him  at  school  and  at  home,  is  a  poor 
witness. 

HL    Jesus  wants  witnesses. 

The  world  does  not  know  of  His  love,  His  willing- 
ness to  save,  and  He  wants  to  make  them  know. 

IV.  Will  you  witness  for  Christ? 

Objection  i.  "I  am  too  young."  Are  you  so  young 
that  you  can  not  tell  of  mother's  love  ?  Do  folks  believe 
you  when  you  say, Mother  is  good?"  Then  you  can 
tell  them  of  Jesus'  love. 

Objection  2.  "I  am  not  good  enough  to  talk  about 
Jesus.  Ask  Jesus  to  make  you  better,  to  help  you  to 
live  aright.  And  perhaps  the  very  effort  you  make  to 
speak  for  Him,  will  help  you. 

V.  How  can  we  witness  for  Jesus  ? 

I.  By  our  lives.  Everybody  is  witnessing,  either 
for  or  against  Christ.  A  child  whose  father  was  a  judge, 
could  not  see  how  his  father  could  decide  when  so  many 
were  talking,  but  it  was  easy  to  understand  when  he 
found  out  that  all  witnessed  on  one  side  or  on  the  other. 
God  looking  on  our  hearts,  knows  every  day  and  every 
hour,  though  others  may  not  be  able  to  see  so  clearly, 
whether  our  lives  are  a  witness  for  or  against  Him. 


OUTLINES. 


153 


(Leader  draw  out  from  the  children,  illustrations  of 
childish  actions  that  dishonor  Jesus.) 

2.  By  our  words.  Often  a  word  has  done  more 
than  a  sermon.  (Leader  illustrate  by  the  little  daughter 
of  Stephen  Paxton,  who  led  her  father  to  Christ,  and  by 
II  Kings  5  :  2-14.)—/?.  P.  Ward, 


Room  for  Jesus, 

Write  at  the  top  of  the  blackboard  the  words,  No 
room  for  Jesus,  Ask  the  children  to  think  how  it 
makes  them  feel  to  be  "left  out."  Speak  of  Jesus 
"despised  and  rejected  of  men."  Read  the  passages 
given  below  to  find  out  some  of  the  places  where  there 
was  no  room  for  Jesus.  As  correct  answers  are  given  by 
the  children,  write  them  on  the  blackboard,  explaining 
and  commenting  upon  each  one.  Then  write  on  the 
board  what  Jesus  himself  said,  Luke  9:  58,  and 
all  together  repeat  the  text — "Foxes  have  holes,  and  birds 
of  the  air  have  nests,  but  the  Son  of  Man  hath  not  where 
to  lay  his  head."  Show  the  children  how,  in  many, 
many  places  there  is  still  no  room  for  Jesus.  A  glass 
full  with  water  cannot  be  filled  with  anything  else  until 
it  is  emptied.  Make  a  personal  application.  Our  hearts, 
if  filled  with  envy,  selfishness,  pride,  etc.,  will  have  no 
room  for  Jesus.  Jesus  will  not  stay  where  sin  abides. 
But  if  we  open  the  door  of  our  hearts  to  Jesus,  He  will 
cast  out  the  sin,  and  come  in  Himself. 

Unless  we  make  room  for  Jesus  in  our  hearts,  there 
will  be  no  room  for  us  in  the   mansions  above." 


154 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


When  completed,  the  outhne  on  the  blackboard  may 
be  as  follows : 


NO  EOOM  FOE  JESUS. 


mthe  inn.  Luke  2  :  7. 

Bethiehem.  Matt.  2:  13,  14. 

the  temple.  John  8:  59. 

the  world.  Jno.  19:  15,  18. 

IS  THEEE  EOOM  FOR  JESUS  IE* 


IVi  I  HEART? 


Carrie  B.  Reynolds. 


The  Hand. 

Call  attention  to  the  structure  and  beauty  of  the 
hand.  Bones  for  firmness,  muscles  for  motion,  nails  to 
protect  ends  of  fingers,  veins  to  carry  blood,  rounded 
forms  for  beauty.    Show  how  it  might  have  looked. 

(See  cut.)  Then  call  a  child  to  the  board, 
and  carefully  mark  around  his  little  hand 
to  show^  how  it  does  look. 

The  hand  is  a  part  of  our  wealth.  How 
much  would  you  take  for  your  right  hand  ? 
Your  left  ?    Why,  we  are  rich  ! 

What  is  the  hand  good  for  ?  Working, 
playing,  a  cup,  a  shovel,  a  vise,  a  pointer, 


OUTLINES, 


155 


a  hammer,  to  talk  with,  etc.  (Children  give  these  and 
other  answers.) 

But  we  will  use  one  of  our  hands  to-day  for  some- 
thing different  from  all  this.    Will  you  repeat  with  me: 

"  I'm  going  to  use  my  two  little  hands, 

To  help  me  remember  the  Savior's  commands."  * 

I  will  call  down  five  "  Be's"  and  put  them  on  the  end 
of  our  fingers  so  we  can  never  forget  them.  They  are  not 
the  stinging  bees.  If  you  were  to  put  five  of  those  on 
the  tips  of  your  fingers  I'm  afraid  you'd  be  stung,  but  if 
you  don't  have  these  other  Be's  on  your  fingers  or  in  your 
hearts  you'll  surely  be  stung. 

Here's  a  Be  we'll  put  on  the  thumb.  (Leader  may 
draw  a  hand  on  the  board,  or  use  the  outline  of  child's 
hand  there,  and  print  the  Be's  at  ends  of  fingers.) 

1 .  Be  Obedient, 

The  first  sin — perhaps  the  worst — is  disobedience, 
Adam,  Moses,  Saul,  are  examples. 

2.  Be  True. 

Easy  to  tell  untruth  with  the  fore  finger,  for  instance, 
to  point  the  wrong  way. 

3,  Be  Gentle, 

The  strongest  finger.  It  takes  strength  to  be  gentle? 
kind,  patient,  forgiving.  The  gentle  boy  makes  the  gen- 
tle-man. In  England,  only  the  gentlemen  and  gentle- 
ladies  come  in  freely  to  the  royal  palace.  So  God,  our 
great  King,  will  let  only  the  gentle  in  heart,  come  into 
the  heavenly  Palace. 

4,  Be  Pure, 

"Blessed  are  the  pure  in  heart,  for  they  shall  see 


♦From  Mrs.  Kent 

/ 


156 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


God."    If  the  heart  is  pure,  the  lips  will  be  pure.  How 
can  we  wash  our  hearts?    I  John  1:7.  1.  c. 
6.  Be  Strong. 

Smallest  finger.  Even  a  little  child  may  be  "  strong 
in  the  Lord."  If  we  keep  this  "  Be  "  on  the  little  finger, 
it  will  be  strong  enough  to  keep  all  the  rest  from  mis- 
chief. Could  a  boy  double  up  his  fist  to  fight,  if  the 
little  finger  should  stand  straight  out  and  say"  I  won't  ?" 
(Illustrate  by  the  fist.) 

What  kind  of  strength?   "To  overcome  evil." 

How  may  we  be  strong?  Christ  will  strengthen. 
Phil.  4:  13. 

How  may  we  catch  and  keep  all  these  Be's.  By 
coming  to  Jesus,  asking  Him  to  help  us. 

(Leader  write  over  the  hand  and  its  Be's,  on  the 
board  "  Lord,  help  me?"  Paper  hands — see  p.  175 — may 
also  be  given  each  child,  at  close.) 


Webs. 

Children,  what  is  this  picture  that  I  am  making  on  the 
blackboard  ?  Fence ! "  Yes  and  this  is  the  ground 
that  the  fence  stands  on.  But  whafs  this?  "Tree!" 
O,  there  isn't  room  for  a  tree  to  grow  down  there,  under 
the  fence.  Try  again.  "  Cat-tail ! "  Yes,  that's  right. 
The  fence  is  built  down  in  a  wet  place  where  cat-tails 
grow.  But  what  is  this  that  I  am  drawing  now? 
"  Spider's  web  ! "  Yes,  and  do  you  see  that  little  black 
(white)  spot  in  the  middle  ?    What  do  you  think  that  is  ? 


OUTLINES. 


157 


"  Spider ! "    How  many  of  you  can  see  a  horrid  big 
spider  there,  just  waiting  for  some  poor  fly? 
What  are  webs  for  ? 

What  do  the  flies  do  when  they  get  caught.  (Buzz- 
struggle — try  to  get  out.) 


What  do  the 
spiders  do? 
(Bite 'em!  Eat 
'em  up !)  Oh, 
but  before  that  ? 
Suppose  its  a 
big  fly,  or  a 
wasp,  and  the 
spider  doesn't 
dare  touch  him 


at  first  ?  (Spins  threads  around  him,  wraps  up  one 
wing,  then  the  other,  ties  down  one  foot  then  the  other — 
then  kills  him,  "  eats  him  up.") 

Suppose  the  fly  only  touches  one  foot  to  the  web  ? 
Couldn't  he  fly  right  away  again  ?    (Web  sticks). 

Children  are  there  any  webs  in  your  houses  ?  Maybe 
not  spiders'  webs  but  worse  than  that  ?  Webs  that  it 
will  take  more  than  a  broom  to  sweep  down  ?  I'll  write 
on  the  board  the  names  of  some  other  webs,  sticky 
things  that  catch  children,  and  men,  and  women  too, 
sometimes,  and  you  tell  me  if  you  have  ever  seen  any  of 
them  around  your  house.      Here's  one : 

The— "  I-didn't-think  Web. 

(Story  of  the  little  boy  who  frightened  his  little  sister 
nearly  to  death  because  he  "  didn't  think.") 


158 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


Here's  another: 

The—"  I-don't-want-to  "—Web. 

(Ask  children  if  they  ever  get  caught  in  this  web, 
when  mama  says,  "  Come  Johnnie,  it's  time  to  get  up — be- 
gin your  lessons — run  on  that  errand,"  etc.) 

Here's  another : 

The—"  By-and-bye  "—Web. 

This  is  the  worst  of  all.  Mamma  says,  "Do  this, 
Annie."  Annie  says,  "  By-and-bye."  And  not  only 
when  mama  speaks  but  when  Jesus  speaks,  Satan  tries 
to  tie  us  up  in  this  web.  Jesus  says:  "Come  to  me 
now,  dear  child.  Give  your  heart  to  me  now."  Child 
says,  "  By-and-bye." 

Does  a  fly  ever  get  out  of  a  spider's  web,  when  once 
in?  Not  very  often,  but  sometimes  when  I  see  a  poor 
fly  caught  and  buzzing  and  struggling  to  get  free,  and 
the  cruel  spider  so  near  to  finish  binding  up  and  killing 
it,  I  take  my  finger  and  tear  down  the  net,  the  spider 
runs  away  and  the  poor  fly  goes  free.  Just  so,  only 
always,  when  Jesus  hears  us  pray  to  Him,  He  breaks  the 
sticky  webs  of  Satan  and  sets  our  souls  free. 

But  suppose  some  poor  silly  fly  should  say  to  me, 
"  No,  no,  I  won't  have  the  web  broken." 

Spiders  have  these  big  webs  made  all  at  once  to  catch 
the  fly  in,  but  Satan  can  only  spin  his  web  around  us,  one 
thread  at  a  time,and  he  can't  even  do  that  unless  we  let 
him.  I  wish  Charlie  would  come  to  me  and  let  me  put 
this  thread  around  his  wrists  once.  Now  see  if  you  can 
break  it?     Oh,  how  easily  it  snapped!    This  shows 


OUTLINES. 


159 


how  easy  it  is  for  children  who  haven't  said  "  By-and- 
bye"  so  many  times,  to  Jesus,  to  break  through  and 
come  to  Him.  But  now  let  me  wind  the  thread  around 
Charlie's  wrists  several  times.  This  is  the  way  it  will  be 
with  us  if  we  grow  up  without  giving  our  hearts  to  Jesus. 
Satan  has  bound  a  great  many  folks  just  this  way.  Boys 
and  girls,  is  he  binding  any  of  you  ?  Last  winter  Jesus 
said  "  Come ! "  but  perhaps  you  said  "  By-and-bye  !  " 
Then  again  He  said  "  come ! "  and  again  you  said  "  By- 
and-bye!"  And  again,  and  again!  (Leader  wind 
thread  about  the  boy's  hands  once  for  every  "  By-and- 
bye.)  Now,  Charlie  see  if  you  can  break  the  threads 
You  can't  do  it.  They  cut  into  your  hands  and  hurt 
you,  but  you  can't  break  them.  How  dreadful  it  would 
be  if  you  could  never  get  them  off.  Hadn't  you  better 
ask  me  to  cut  them  for  you  ?  See  how  quickly  I  do  it. 
Now,  shall  we  let  Satan  bind  our  souls  -by  saying  "By- 
and-bye,"  "  By-and-bye,"  any  more,  when  Jesus  calls  to 
us?  And  shall  we  not  ask  Jesus  to  break  the  bands 
already  around  us,  and  help  us  to  come  to  Him  this  very 
day?  Let  us  pray. — By  R,  Used  by  per.  of  Dr.  y.  H. 
Vincent, 


Crowns. 

A  Crown  of  Thorns  (John  19:  2)  was  worn  Djr 
Jesus  that 

A  Crown  of  loving  kindness  and  tender  mercy  (Ps. 
103  :  4)  may  be  worn  by  me. — B.  F.  J. 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


One  Boy's  Experience. 

(An  Object  Lesson.) 

Text:  Evil  communications  corrupt  good  manners ; "  or,  keeping  bad  com- 
pany makes  good  children  bad. 

Objects  for  illustration:  i.  A  two  ounce  bottle  two- 
thirds  full  of  a  strong  solution  of  corrosive  sublimate, 
prepared  by  any  druggist.  2.  Another  bottle  half-full 
of  water  in  which  has  privately  been  dissolved  a 
little  potassium  iodide ;  and  3.  Some  of  the  beautiful 
white  crystals  of  potassium  iodide.  Handle  the  chem- 
icals with  care.  Practice  beforehand.  Remember  that 
corrosive  sublimate  is  a  deadly  poison!  Do  not  leave  it 
carelessly  standing  about. 

I.  The  bad  boy  is  represented  by  the  poison;  the 
good  boy  by  the  water.  The  one  is  a  deadly  poison, 
though  he  looks  nice,  don't  show  the  evil  on  the  outside. 
The  good  boy  has  been  well  brought  up,  attended  Sun- 
day-school, never  yet  run  into  evil.  But  now  he  begins 
to  go  in  company  a  little  with  the  bad  boy. 

II.  The  process  of  corrupting  the  good  boy. 

1.  He  goes  a  little  with  the  bad  boy.  (Pour  a  little 
of  the  poison  into  thfe  bottle  of  water,  holding  it  steadily. 
It  is  colored  a  little.)  He  is  troubled  a  little  by  it  at 
first.  Then  says :  "  Other  boys  go  with  him.  I  had 
some  fun  any  way  I "  So  soon  forgets  his  bad  feelings. 
(Shake  bottle,  all  clears  up.) 

2.  Now  he  plays  truant  from  day-school.  (Illustrate 
as  before.) 

3.  Now  breaks  Sabbath — disobeys  his  parents, 
swears,  fights,  goes  to  a  saloon,  steals,  etc.    (At  each  sin 


OUTLINES, 


161 


add  more  poison,  shaking  the  bottle  to  make  it  clear  up, 
till  the  very  last,  when  it  will  not  clear.)  Now  the  boy- 
is  thoroughly  corrupt,  does  all  bad  things,  is  as  bad  as 
the  bad  boy. 

III.  Process  of  reclaiming  the  prodigal.  His  heart 
is  reached  by  the  Spirit  of  God.  He  wants  to  turn,  but 
is  not  quite  ready.  Reads  the  Word  of  God.  Finds : 
"Though  your  sins  be  diS  scarlet,  they  shall  be  as  white 
as  snow." 

1.  He  decides  to  leave  bad  company.  (Set  aside  the 
bottle  of  poison.)  Tries  to  make  himself  better  (shake 
the  bottle),  but  he  can't.    (It  stays  red.) 

2.  Now  he  turns  toward  Christianity.  (Add  to  the 
bottle  a  few  of  the  white  grains  of  the  iodide,  which  rep- 
resents Christianity.    Do  not  shake.) 

3.  He  goes  back  to  a  Sunday-school,  speaks  the 
truth  again,  obeys  his  parents,  begins  to  pray,  etc.  (As 
every  good  thing  is  mentioned,  add  a  little  of  the  iodide. 
Watch  the  bottom  of  the  bottle  closely  till  it  begins  to 
clear.) 

4.  But  the  boy  sees  that  this  is  not  enough.  The 
Spirit  of  God  draws  him,  and  now  he  gives  his  whole 
heart  to  God.  (Here  add  a  considerable  of  the  iodide, 
and  shake.  The  mixture  clears,  perfectly.)  Do  you 
remember  the  promise?  "Though  your  sins  be  as  scarlet, 
they  shall  be  as  white  as  snow," 

IV.  This  which  now  represents  the  converted  boy, 
is  now,  the  doctors  tell  us,  a  medicine  to  do  good  to  sick 
people — the  poison  is  all  gone.  So  the  boy  now  does 
good  to  others — devotes  his  life  to  curing  other  sin-sick 
souls, — Rev.  T.  P.  Marsh. 


162 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


(Suggestive  Programme.) 
A  GHILDI^EN'S  MEETING 

Will  be  held  every  Friday  afternoon,  at  Four  o'clock,  for'  eight 
weeks,  at  the  house  of 


General  Subject— Bible  Children, 
Nov,    7.  Cain,  the  First  Baby. 
Nov.  14,  Moses,  the  Adopted  Child, 
Nov.  21.  Samuel,  the  Prophet  Child. 
Nov.  28.   David,  the  Brave  Boy, 
Dec.    5.  The  Missionary  Maiden. 
Dec,  12.  Daniel,  The  Temperance  Boy. 
Dec.  1  9.  Timothy,  the  Bible  Student. 
Dec.  26.  Jesus,  the  Saviour  Child, 


**Jesus  said:  Suffer  little  children  to  come  unto  me,  and  forbid 
them  not^for  of  such  is  the  kingdom  of  God*  " 


lESSOI^S  IN  BRIEP. 


163 


CHAPTER  XV. 
LESSONS  IN  BRIEF, 
Gathered  from  Many  Sources. 

A  withered  leaf  tells  how  we  all  do  fade  — M,  G,  B. 

A  ring  or  circle  may  teach  the  endless  deration  of 
eternity.— J/.  G,  B. 

A  handful  of  withered  grass,  the  frailty  of  our  human 
lives.    Ps.  90:  5. — R, 

A  piece  of  bread  may  direct  the  starving  soul  to  the 
all-satisfying  Bread  of  Life.— J/.  G.  B. 

A  handful  of  chaff  which  a  breath  blows  away,  will 
illustrate  the  fleeting  estate  of  the  wicked.   Ps.  i  :  4. — R. 


164 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


A  four-leaved  clover  may  illustrate  blessings  which 
are  all  around  our  path,  though  so  often  unnoticed. — C. 

single  thread,  easily  broken — many  times  doubled, 
impossible  to  break — may  illustrate  the  power  of  habit. — 
Mr.  Moody. 

A  hair  drawn  from  your  head,  may  serve  as  a  text  for 
a  sermon  on  the  ever  watchful  love  and  care  of  our 
Father.— AT.  G.  B, 


\  CO 

An  even tfuH  m eetim 

•■■■../■  ■ 

Acts.  8. 

7 

26.  ^0. 

A  bit  of  incense — some  sweet-smeUing  drug — thrown 
on  coals  may  illustrate  how  our  prayers  ascend  before 
God.    Rev.  5  :  8.-7?. 

A  glowing  autumn  leaf  teaches  that  the  last  hours  of 
earthly  life  may  be  more  gloriously  beautiful  than  all  that 
have  gone  before. — M,  G.  B, 

Put  a  disagreeable  picture  in  a  bottle.  Does  it  show 
through?  So  if  we  put  bad  reading,  stories,  in  our  mind 
they  will  show  out  in  our  words,  f^ces,  actions. — Mrs. 
Crafts, 


ZESSOJVS  IN  BRIEF. 


165 


Luke  i8:  9-14.  Make 
figures  before  the  children. 
Use  something  as  follows: 
Here  (No.  i)  is  where -the 
Pharisee  thought  himself.'' 
Here  (No.  2)  is  where  God 
thought  him.  Here  (No.  3) 
is  where  the  Publican  thought 
himself.  Here  (No.  4)  is  where 
God  thought  him.  — R.  B. 

A  balance  may  teach  the  exact  justice  of  God.  Or 
may  illustrate  the  moment  of  decision  for  Christ,  by 
placing  in  one  scale  a  heavy  card  labeled  "  God's  Love." 
or  "  The  love  of  Christ  constraineth  us." — R, 

Illustrate  soul  and  body  by  case  and  works  of  a 
watch.  Which  is  the  real  watch?  Which  the  real 
child  ?  Need  the  watch  stop  going  if  the  case  were  taken 
off  and  buried  ? — R. 

A  branch  with  drooping,  withered  leaves,  may  illus- 
trate how  all  the  Christian's  life  is  drawn  from  Christ — 
apart  from  Him  we  die,  become  useless,  are  cast  out. 
John  15:  1-6.—/?. 

The  child  not  bent  by  bad  habits  and  associa- 
tions is  like  a  straight  pin. 

The  boy  taken  in  time  can  be 
bent  back  into  straightness. 

The  boy  or  girl  of  fourteen 
or  sixteen,  so  bent  by  bad 
thoughts  and  habits — hard  to  straighten.— y.  C. 


166  CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


Let  each  perpendicular  line  after  bi'rt V  mark  ofif  ten 
years.  Notice  how  difficulties  in  the  way  of  conversion 
increase. — D.  R.  B 


Gates  of  Paradise. 

Shut  to  Adam  because  of  sin.    Gen.  3  :  24. 
Opened  to  Christ.    Ps.  24:  7. 

Opened  to  saints,  cleansed  from  sin.  Rev.  22: 
Suppers.  ri4,  (R.V.) 

The  Gospel  Supper.    Luke  14:  16. 

The  Marriage  Supper.    Rev.  19:  9. 

A  sheet  of  tissue  paper  rolled  up  into  a  little  ball 
may  illustrate  a  single  act  of  ours,  which  looks  small, 
but  will  be  found  to  be  great  when  its  influence  is  un- 
folded.—/^. D.  E.  C. 

A  bit  of  shining  silver,  teaspoon  or  napkin  ring,  in 
which  children  can  see  their  faces,  may  illustrate  how 
Jesus  refines  the  hearts  of  His  people  till  He  can  see  His 
image  there. — Mrs.  Crafts. 


LESSONS  m  BRIEF. 


167 


An  example  in  long  division  worked  out  before  the 
class,  with  a  mistake  at  the  very  first  makes  all  the 
work  wrong,  though  it  looks  right.  The  mistake  of  not 
choosing  to  be  a  Christian  makes  all  the  life  wrong. — Mrs, 
Crafts. 

An  example  in  addition  and  subtraction.  Put  in 
two  columns  "What  Jesus  gives"  and  "What  the  world 
gives."  Acid  the  columns  separately.  One  gives  us 
"  Eternal  Life,'  the  other  Altogether  Vanity."  Find  the 
difference. — R, 

A  bit  of  black  paper  cut  in  oblong  shape  and  pasted 
by  one  edge  on  a  foundation  to  swing  hke  a  door,  may 
illustrate  the  door  of  death.  But  swing  back  the 
door  and  show  gilt  paper — symbol  of  glory — beneath 
the  black. — Emma  F.  Parsons. 

Illustrate  motive  by  main-spring  of  watch.    If  spring 
is  wrong,  haftids  go  wrong.  If  heart  is  wrong,  hands  fight, 
steal,  "get  into -mischief."    To  get  watch  right,  take 
it  to  watch-maker,  he  made  it.    So  to  get  hearts  right, 
take  to  God.   He  made,  can  set  in  order. — T.  P.  Nisbett. 

A  cocoon  from  which  the  butterfly  has  flown  to  flit 
joyously  from  flower  to  flower  in  the  sunshine  of  the 
upper  air,  is  a  fit  symbol  of  the  body  of  the  believer  after 
temporal  death— an  empty  casket,  whose  occupant  soaring 
above,  exults  evermore  in  the  light  and  love  of  the  eternal 
world.— J/.  G.  B. 

In  the  museum  at  Naples  are  loaves  of  bread  from 
the  ruins  of  Pompeii,  with  the  maker's  initials  plainly  seen 
stamped  on  them.  The  stamp  was  imprinted  on  the 
bread  when  it  wac  soft,  and  will  always  remain.  The 


168 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS, 


child's  heart  is  like  the  loaf.  If  ''Jesus '  is  stamped  on  it 
when  young,  it  will  never  be  effaced. — R. 

Josh.  4:  8-10.  Let  teacher  prepare  twelve  stones, 
not  too  large  to  be  handled,  by  painting  on  each  the 
name  of  some  of  God's  blessings  to  us,  "Christ  Jesus," 
"The  Comforter,"  "The  Bible,"  "Reason,"  "Home," 
"  Friends,"  etc.  Tell  the  Bible  story,  and  then  erect  a 
monument  with  the  stones  before  the  class. — Mrs.  Crafts, 

A  mirror  or  bright  metallic  surface,  reflecting  in  daz- 
zWrxg  brightness  the  rays  of  the  sun,  teaches  how  Christ- 
ians, the  light  of  the  world,  shine  by  reflecting  the  light 
first  received  from  the  Sun  of  Righteousness.  Move  the 
reflector  out  of  the  sun,  and  teach  that  only  while  dwell- 
ing with  Jesus  and  receiving  light  from  Him,  can  any  one 
shine  as  a  light  in  the  world. — M.  G,  B. 

A  child  bound  willingly  to  a  chair,  so  that  he  cannot 
enter  a  pleasanter  room,  or  go  to  a  friend  who  calls  him, 
may  illustrate  how  Satan  binds  us,  if  we  let  him^  and  so 
keeps  us  out  of  heaven,  and  away  from  God.  Then  let 
the  child  call  the  strong  friend  to  come  and  unbind  him, 
and  so  illustrate  how  God  can  break  the  bonds  of  the 
evil  one. — R. 

Eph.  3:15.  God's  family.  Large,  rich,  part  in 
heaven,  part  here,  do  not  all  know  each  other  but  the 
Father  knows  all.  All  named  after  our  Older  Brother — 
Christ-ians.  Call  each  other  "  brother,"  "  sister."  Des- 
cribe New  England  Thanksgiving  day,  with  its  home- 
gatherings,  and  by  it  illustrate  the  great  Thanksgiving 
home-gathering  in  Heaven,  by  and  by.  Would  you 
like  to  join  the  family  1- — R, 


LESSONS  IN  BRIEF, 


169 


A  Triangle  may  be  frequently  used  in  illustratioiic 
We  give  some  examples  : 


Illustration  (not  explana- 
tion) of  the  Trinity.  Make 
the  figure  eauilateral. 


FATHER 


PRAVER 


Symmetrical 
Christian  charac- 
ter. Neither  one 
or  two  sides  will 
make  a  perfect 
triangle. — J,  C. 


FASTH 


I  Cor.  13:  13. 
Foundation,  Faith. 

Greatest  of  these," 
Charity. — R, 


An  autograph  album  will  illustrate  God  s  Book  of 
Life,  where  He  writes  the  names  of  His  friends.  John 
15:  14.    I  John  3:  22.    Rev.  21:  27. —  W.  B.  J. 


17a 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


CHRIST 


Matt.  17:  3. 

M,  A.  G. 


A  charred  and  blackened  stick  with  several  white 
ones,  rr.ay  represent  the  effect  of  bad  company.  Rub 
the  sticks  together.  The  black  one  gets  no  whiter,  but 
the  white  ones  are  blackened. — Knox  P,  Taylor, 

Or  the  same  thing  may  be  illustrated  by  a  glass  oi 
pure  water  and  a  bottle  of  ink.  A  few  drops  of  water 
in  the  ink  make  no  particular  difference,  but  a  few  drops 
of  ink  in  the  water  darken  it  greatly. — C. 


Mark  10 :  46-52. 


BARTniETJS 


JESUS 


Sat  begging. 
Heard. 
Cried  out. 
Cried  the  more. 
Cast  away  garment 


(liindrance). 
Sprang  up  [Revised,) 
Came. 
Asked. 
Received. 
Followed. 


Heard. 


Stood  still. 


5» 


Called. 


Listened. 


Answered. 


LESSONS  lAT  BRIEF. 


171 


Leader  prepare  ten  hands  cut  from  paper,  (see pattern, 
page  175)  and  on  each  write  subject  and  reference  as 
given  below.  These  are  to  be  given  to  the  children,  and 
read. in  order. 

1.  Eves  disobedient  hands.    Gen.  3:  2-6 

2.  Adam's  stealing  hands.    Gen.  3  :  6. 

3.  Jeroboam's   idol-making  hands.      I  Kings 

12:  28-30,  and  13:4. 

4.  Sabbath-breaking  hands.    Neh.  13:15-19. 

5.  Drunkard-making  hands.    Hab.  2:15. 

6.  Herod's  murderous  hands.    Matt.  2  :  16. 

7.  Pilate's  hands.    Matt.  27  :  24. 

8.  Paul's  persecuting  hands.  Acts  26 :  9-12. 

9.  Clean  hands.    Ps.  24;4. 

10.    Jesus'  hands.   Matt.  8:3;  Mark  5  :  41 ;  Mark 
8:23;  John  20 :  25  and  27 ;  Luke  24 :  50. 

Mrs.  W.  F.  Crafts. 


72 


CHILDREN'S  MEETINGS. 


CHAPTER  XVI. 
PATTERN  PAGES  AND  MUSIC 

Note. — The  following  plates  are  intended  to  lurnish 
patterns  from  which  "Symbol  Gifts"  can  be  cut  for  the 
children.  Place  thin  paper  over  the  pattern  of  the  object 
you  wish  to  use  and  mark  the  outline  in  pencil.  Cut 
this  out  and  transfer  to  stiffer  paper.  Now,  by  placing  this 
stiff  pattern  on  four  or  six  thicknesses  of  common  writ- 
ing paper  firmly  held,  a  large  number  of  "  symbols  "  can 
be  easily  and  quickly  cut.  For  more  durable  work,  cut 
them,  one  by  one,  out  of  cardboard,  or  with  a  scroll  saw 
have  them  sawed  out  of  thin  sheets  of  wood. 

Use  any  text,  motto,  or  device  that  may  seem  desir- 
able. But  when  many  are  given,  in  large  meetings,  the 
labor  of  writing  even  a  text  on  each  is  great.  Some 
"  symbols "  may  furnish  a  subject  for  a  whole  lesson.  (See 
lesson  on  The  Hand,  p.  154.) 

The  outlines  of  Temple  Furniture  (kindly  furnished 
by  Miss  Emma  Wright)  are  intended  to  be  studied  to- 
gether. In  making  outhne,  cut  around  the  outer  mark 
only,  and  fill  in,  if  your  time  will  permit,  with  pencil.  It 
will  be  found  not  desirable  to  give  symbols  too  often. 

The  Twenty-five  Pages  of  Music  will  be  found  simple, 
but  standard;  and, we  hope, will  supply  a  long  felt  wantc 


KEY*    TRUMPETv  STAFF* 


HEART.  LAMB, 


Hand,  ladder. 


ANCIENT  LAMP.  SICKLIT 


CROWN  OF  THORNS.  BOAT. 


ALTAR  OF  BURNT  OFFERING. 


PATTERN  PAGE. 


181 


ARK  OF  THE  COVENANT. 


LAYER.    TABI.E  OF  SHEW-BREAD.     GOI.DEN  ALTAR  AND 
CANDLESTICK. 


HAPPY  LAND.  183 

Old  Melody. 

W—^i  i—m  9  E  -J_2_-j_D_g;^  .3 

1.  There     is     a      hap -py  land,     Far,     far       a  -  way,  ) 
Where  saints  in     glo  -  ry  stand,  Bright,  bright  as   day  ;  ) 

2.  Bright,    in  that    hap-py  land,    Beams    ev  -  'ry  eye;  ) 
Kept     by     a     Fa-ther's hand,    Love    can  -  not  die,  ) 

3.  Come     to  that    hap-py  land.    Come,  come     a-way;  ) 
Why     will  you  doubt-ing  stand  ?  Why    still  de-lay?) 


m 

^1 

-»    r    t  - 

i 


ant* 


r-fr  — !  -1 


Oh,  how  thy  sweet-ly  sing,  "Worth-y  is  our  Sav-ior  King," 
Oh,  then  in  glo-ry  run;  Be  a  crown andking-dom  wOn ; 
Oh,  we  shall  hap  py  be,   When  from  sin  and  sor  -  row  free, 


^    it  ^ 


 1!  U  y  ^—l  y  1- 


A  A 

i?=t=pt=::|:=:t:= 


Loud     let  His    prais-es  ring.   Praise,  praise    for  aye! 
And  bright,  a  -  bove  the  sun,    Reign     ev   -  er-more. 
Lord,     we  shall  dwell  with  thee,  Blest     ev  -  er-more. 


184 


I  WILL  SING  FOR  JESUS. 


Philip  Phillips,  by  per. 


if      *  -#■ 


1.  I   will  sing  for  Je  -  sus,  With  his  blood  He  bought  me,  And 

2.  Can  there  o-ver-take    me.  An  -  y  dark  dis  -  as  -  ter, 

3.  I   will  sing  for  Je  -  sus,  His  name  a  -  lone  pre  -  vail  -  ing, 

4.  Still  I'll  sing  for  Te  -  sus,  O,  how  I  will   a  -  dore  Him,  A- 

S   m  . 


 d_  '  ^  .L^L#_#  ^ 


all     a-longmy  pil-grim way,Hislov-inghandhasbroughtme. 
While   I  sing  for  Je    -    sus,  My  bless  ed,  bless-ed  Mas  -  ter. 
Shall  be  my  sweet-estmu-sic.  When  heart  and  flesh  are  fail-ing. 
mongthe  cloud  of  wit-ness-es.Who  cast  their  crowns  before  Him. 


15=1 


Chorus. 


0  0—0  0  ^0   T  ^  ^0—%-0-^-^0—,  0  1 

sto  -  ry 

Et:=fr 


O   help  me  sing  for  Je  -  sus,     Help  me  tell  the  sto  -  ry, 

JL.M  ,  «  •  «  •  0^-. 


■0 — 0 — 0- 


^  0-^0  0—0  0  0-^0  0  0  #-LJ..l_^.__JJ 


Of  Him  who  did  re-deem  us,  The  Lord  of  life  and  glo 


JESUS  KNOWS. 


185 


V.  J.  K. 


Mrs.  V.  J.  Kent,  by  per. 


1.  All  our    lit  -  tie  heart-aches,    All  our  joys  and  woes, 

2.  When  we  play  or      stud  -  y,    When  we  wake  or  sleep, 


All  ourhopesnnd  wish  -  es,  Je  -  sus  says,  he  knows. 
He  de-lights  to    bless    us,      And  his  chil-dren  keep, 


9- 

It  '  M  ^ 

-0 — 0 — 0 — 0 — 

-ft-p — \/ — t — \/ — 

tr- J?   y  * 

1 

And  our  ev  -  'ry  ac  -  tion.  Is  to  Je  -  sus  known, 
He  will  al  -  ways  guide   us,       Lis -ten  to    our  prayers, 


i 


1= 


1 


From  the  time  we're  lit  -  tie,  Till  we're  ful  -  ly  grown. 
For  the  lov  -  ing   Sav  -  ior,      P'or   his  chil-dren  cares, 

.  ,  ^  *-  J*-  >  -^  -^  ^ 


i 


186 


WILL  TELL  JESUS. 


Julia  II.  Johnston. 


3^ 


U  P  b 

.  I've  a  dear  Sav  -  ior,  read-y  to    lis  -  ten,Bend-ing  to  hear  me 
.  When  I  am  joy-ous,  in  the  glad  sun-shine,  I  will  tell  Him  who 
.  When  I'm  in  dan-ger,when  I'm  in  dark-ness, Tempted  to  think  no 
.  Trou-ble  and  sor-row  drive  me  to   Je  -  sus,Whom  be-side  Him, on 
If     I  am  tempt-ed,  if    I   dis-trust  Him,  If    I   for -get  and 


mm 


^  «  m^sl  -g. —  *— *-jf*   • — ^ 

from  on  high,     Ev  -  en  the  hum-blest,  Je-suswill  wel-come, 
loves  me    so,     Sure-ly  my     Sav  -  ior  vrait-cth  to     hear  it, 
Help-er    near,    Stilll'llnin     to   Him,  tellHimthe  sto  -  ry, 
earth, have  I?     Oth-ersmay  love  me,     Je-suscan  save  me, 
go    a  -  stray.  Still  I'll  re  -  turn  and    tell  it  to      Je  -  sus, 

 1 — ^j*— — ^-^t- — t  0 — ^^f— y— t — "^i — P— 


Chorus. 

Ev-'rylow  whis-per  finds  him  nigh.        I  will  tell  Je  -  sus, 

Ev-'ry  sweet  se  -  cret   He  shall  know.       I  will  tell  Je  -  sus. 

Ask  Him  to  keep  from  harm  and  fear.        I  will  tell  Je  -  sus, 

Je  -  sus  will  hear  me   when  I     cry.         I  will  tell  Je  -  sus, 

Ask  Him  to  keep  me     ev  -  'ry  day.        I  will  tell  Je  -  sus. 


m 

t  *  *  ' 

1 

 0  

1     ^  ^. 

*  ti  t? 

J0  1  

L,  ^  

3— P^-^-^ 

Copyright,  1884,  by  Lucy  J.  Rider, 


WILL  TELL  JESUS-Concluded. 


 «  L^jp— J — 1-#  ,  L  ,  


I  will  tell  Je-sus,  He  ismy  friend,  my  Sav-ior,  King,  I  will  tell 


 L|  ^  J  1  0  1_|  L  i 


i 


if'-'— -fr 


3=i 


•a- 


If*  -i-'-^-^-^^— '-^-^  ^ 

Je-sus,    I  willtell  Je  -  sus,    I  will  tell  Je  -  sus   ev  - 'ry  thing. 


COWPER. 


I  DO  BELIEVE. 


Old  Melody. 


1.  There  is    a  fountain  filled  with  blood  Drawn  from  Immanuel's  veins, 

2.  The    dy-ingthief re-joiced  to  see  That  fountain  in    his  day, 

3.  Thou  dy-ing  Lamb,thy  precious  blood  Shall  nev  -er  lose  its  power, 

4.  E'er  since  by  faith  I    sawthe  stream  Thy  flowing  wounds  sup  -  ply, 


-© — e>- 


EEEEEEEE 


I       do  believe,  I     now  believe  That  Je-sus  died  for  me 


A.nd  sinners  plunged  be-neath  that  flood, Lose  all  their  guilt  -  y  stains. 
Andtheremay  I,    tho'  vile  as  he,    Wash  all  my  sins  a  -  way. 

Till  all  the  ransomed  church  ofGod  Are  saved  to  sin  no  more. 
Re-deem-ing  love  has  been  my  theme  Andshall  be  till    I  die. 


EE 


r 


And  by  his  bloodjhis  precious  blood,  I    am  from  sin  set  free. 


SWEET  STORY. 


#  9 — #— #— # — 


think  when  I  read  that  sweet  sto  -  ry  of  old,  When 
wish  that  Hishands  had  been  plac'd  on  my  head, That  His 
still      to  His   foot-stool  in  pray'r  I  may  go,  And 
that    beau-ti  -  ful  place  He  has  gone  to  pre-pare.  For 
long      for  the  joys     of  thnt  glo  -  ri-ous  place,  The 


-0 — # — 0- 

It: 


iu  F^-N— n-H  Ph-h'^-N-h  5---, 

t?+t  1  '-^ — I  ^  •  K — — \-0-^  1  K — N--1 

Je  -  sus  was  here  a-mong  men,  How  He  called  little  chil-dren  as 
armshad  been  thrown  around  me,  And  that  I  mighthave  seen  his  kind 
ask' for  a  share  of  His  love,     And      if     I  thus  earn-est-ly 
all  who  arewash'dandfor-giv'n.    And   ma  -  ny  dear  chil-dren  are 
sweet-est,  and  hright-est,  andbest,When  the  dear  lit-tle  chil  dren  of 


^©-2-         #  0— 

r-0  

#- 

 1  1  ,  

lambs  to  his  fold,     I  should  like  to  have  been  with  them,  then, 
look  when  He  said, *'Let  the   lit  -  tie  ones  come  un-to  me." 
seek  Him  be-low,     I  shall  see  Himandhear  Hima  -  bove. — 
gath  -  er  -  ing  there, "For  of  such    is   the  king-dom  of  heav'n.'^ 
ev    -  er  -  y  clime,  Shall  crowd  to  His  arms  and  be  blest. 


THOU  ART  MY  SHEPHERD.  /89 


Miss  Elsie  Thalheimer.  German. 


1.  Thou    art  my  shep-herd,     Car  -  ing  in       ev  -  'ry  need, 

2.  Or    .  if   my    way     lie  Where  death  o'er-hang-ing  nigh, 


Thy      lit  -  tie    Iamb  to    feed,    Trust  -  ing  thee  still; 
My      soul  would  ter  -  ri  -  fy       With     sud  -  den  chill, — 

^  r^^  ^  •  r0  s-  ^- 


L-a— I  f- 


.  p:  r-  «  (-0  M  ^  1 


-j,-- i  ^^_H'^^-^^— s  —J^^. 


In  the  green  pas-tures  low,  Where  liv  -  ing  wa  -  ters  flow. 
Yet      I     am  not    a  fraid;  While  soft-ly     on     my  head 


0  0  0 — 

0  0-^0  

r-#        0  0        Ji0  0  0  , 

-f  1  0  

-#  — «  — p  1  ^ — ^ — 

1/    U  ■ 

Safe  by  thy  side  I  go.  Fear  -  ing  no  ill. 
Thy      ten-der  hand  is     laid,        I       fear  no  ill. 


'  r— Fr  h— r  - 

■0-  -0- 

y — y 

I  WANT  TO  BE.  WITH  JESUS. 


Old  Melody, 


I.I   want  to  be   with  Je  -  sus,When  I    shall  cometo  die, 
2. 1   nev  -  er  shall  be  wea  -  ry  Nor   ev  -  er  shed   a  tear, 
3. 1  know  I'm  weak  and  sin  -  fuI,But  Je  -  suswill  for -give, 
' '       sus  And  with  the  an  -  gels  stand, 

—  ^  :  r-0  -  '—0—0  0- 


4.0h,then  I'll  be  with  Je^ 


Not    in    the  grave  to    tar  -  ry,  But  straight  to  heav'n  to  fly. 
Nor    ev  -  er  know  a    sor  -  row,  Nor  ev  -  er  feel    a  fear; 
For  man  -  y  lit  -  tie  chil-dren  Have  gone  to  Heav'n  to  live, 
A  crown  up -on   my  fore  -  head  A^  harp   with-in   my  hand. 

0  0  0  1-|  1  1- — r*'-^ — f — ^  * — |-  <5- 


— ©■ 


-\  i-m-  w — w  r — 1-  CK— 


There  right  be -fore  my  Sav  -  ior,  So    glo-rious  and   so  pure, 
Butbless  -  ed,  pure  and  ho  -  ly,  I'll  dwell  on  that  blest  shore, 
Dear  Sav  -  ior  when  I    lan-guish,And  lay   me  down  to  die, 
And  there,  be- fore  my  Sav  -  ior,  So    glo-rious  and    so  pure, 
f  I 

1  2  —  1  s— rU  Is  is  i-'-i-   


It--: 


I'llwak«  thesweet-est  mu  -  sic  And  praise  him  ev  -  er  -  more. 
And  with  ten  thousand  thousands  I'll  praise  him  ev  -  er -more. 
Oh,  send    ashin-ing  an  -  gel  To  bear  me  to    the  sky. 


I'll  join  theheavenlycho  -  rus  And  praise  Hir»  ev-er-more. 


JESUS  LOVES  ME.  191 

Miss  Anna  Warner.  Wm.  B.  Bradburt. 


1.  Je  -  sus  loves   me,   this      I   know,   For  the   Bi  -  ble 

2.  Je  -  sus  loves   me,    He  who  died,  Heav-en's  gate  to 

3.  Je  -  sus  loves  me,   He   will  stay,    Close  be -side  me 


tells  me  so,  Lit -tie  ones  to  Him  be-long,They  are  weak,  but 
o-penwide.  He  will  wash  a  -  way  my  sm.  Let  his  lit  -  tie 
all  the  way.      If   I   love  Him, when  I  die,    He  will  take  me 


I 


v—v- 


— >-# — ,-7 —  ^ —  y — ' 


Chorus. 


He  is  strong.  Yes,  Je  -  sus  loves  me.   Yes,     Je-sus  lovesme, 
child  come  in. 
home  on  high. 


 il — «_   Lfi  ,  ..  _.[,_L^ — —  ? — -y— L# —  1 


Yes,     Je  -  sus  loves  me.     The   Bi  -  ble  tells    me  so. 


Copyrighted,  1862,  in  "Golden  Shower."    Used  by  per.  Biglow  &  Main. 


192 


SAILING  O'ER  THE  SEA. 


I.  B. 


Baltzell,  by  per. 


r  We're  a  hap  -  pypil-grim band, Sail-ing  to  the  good-ly  land, 
\  Tho' thetemp-estrag- es  long, There  is  One  amongthethrong. 
When  the  might-ybil-lows  swell,  With  the  saved  it  shall  be  well. 
Rolling  waves  shall  noto  er-whelm,  For  we've  Jesus  at  the  helm. 


Chorus. 


fe^^^i'^ri=-1  =^-^^-:5^^=^Fi^'PF 


With  aswell-ingsail  we  on  ward  sweep;  ) 

^  >  We  are  sail 
ep.  j 


Who  will  guide  ussafe-ly  o'er  the  de 
Tho' thebreak-ersroar  up-on  the  1 
Andhe'llguideus safe-ly  o'er  the  sea 


inoro'erthe 


We  are  sailing, we  are 


 s-T-i-r*-'-*— h-— r-'-'-^— r<S>-'— r  1 — f^- 


sea, 

sail-ingo'er  the  sea. 


,  ■-w--'0   


ing  o'erthesea. 
We  are  sailing,  we  are  sailing  o'er  the  sea. 


—w—w  , 


to 


g^  ^^u^i 

sail  -  ingo'erthesea;        To  a  blest       e-ter  ni-ty. 
Wearesailing,we  are  sailing  o'er  the  sea,    To  ablest  e-ter-ni  -  ty,  e-ter-ni-ty. 


p^rr-: — ; — 0-0-0*  0-0^0-r0  '-0  0  --0-0  y'l — M — H — i — ^r<5>—  ~w-n 


'M  BUT  A  YOUTHFUL  PILGRIM. 


193 


1.  I'm  but  a  youth  ful  pil-gnm,Myjour-ney*sjust  be-gun,  They 

2.  Then  like  a    lit  -  tie  pil-grim,What-ev  -  er    I     may  meet,  I'll 

3.  Then  tri -als  can-not  vex  me.  And  pain  I  need  not  fear,  For 

^    A   ^   #  A 


-- N— 


say  I'll  meet  withsor  row,  Before  myjoar-ney's  done;The  worldisfuU  of 
take  it — joy  or  sorrow — Andlay  at  Jesus*  feet;  He'll  comfort  me  in 
when  I' m  close  by  Je-sus, Grief  cannot  come  too  near ;  Not  even  death  can 

M.  JL  ^  JL  j 

-|---rl  — ^ — * — r—  ^-rf — f — P — 


 0 — # — ^  1 — pi  — ^ — ' — •   *-r^ — ♦ — F — ^  1 


I    b  U  ^  ^ 


wt — N — — — h5-a  n-H — s-^F* — — ^ 

 # — ^  # — ^-.r^  a_L^_-^ — ^ — 


trou-ble,  And  tri  -  als,  too,  they  say,  But  I  will  fol  -  low 
trou-ble.  He'll  wipe  my  tears  a -way,  With  joy  1*11  fol  -  low 
harm  me,  When  death  I  meet  one  day,    Toheav'n  I'll  fol  -  low 


 #  0  0  r-#-i  0—0-^  0  r-0  0- 


 ^  ^  —J 

■0  0  #  0  A 

■0  0  1  h-.  


Sn-— K— ^— pH  .  1^  ^  N  ^   ,  -I  


Je-sus,  All  the  way,  But  I  will  follow  Je-sus,  All  the  way. 
Je-sus,  All  the  way ,Withjoy  I'll  fol-low  Je-sus,  All  the  way. 
Je-sus,  All  the  way,  To  heav'n  I'll  follow  Jesus, All  the  way. 


Copyrighted,  1867,  in  'Tresh  Laurels.''    Used  by  .per.  Biglow  &  Maxm. 


194 


ANGRY  WORDS. 


H.  R.  Palmer,  by  per. 


tongue  un-br 
hipistoosa 
:ho'tsarera 


1.  An-gry  words,  O  letthem  nev-er, From  the  tongueun-bri-dled  slip; 

2.  Love  ismuch  toopureand  ho-ly, Friendship istoo sa-cred  far, 

3.  An-gry  words  are  light-lrspo-keii;  Bitteresl  tho'tsarerash-ly  stirred; 
11'  II  II  I 


i 


i 


May  the  heart'sbestimpalseev-erCheck  them  ere  they  soil  the  lip. 

For  a  moment's  reck-less  fol-ly  Thus  to  des  -  o-late  and  mar. 
Bright-est  links  oflife  are  bro-ken   By  a  sin  -  glc  an  -  gry  word. 

1         II       11         I    '  ' 


Lore  one  an  -  oth  -  er.  Thas  saith  theSaTjor.ChildrenobeTyonrFa-tlier'sblestcoraniand, 

Love  each  o;her.     Love  each  other,  '  Tis  thy  Fa-ther's  blest  command, 


'--0-0' 


Lore  one  an-oth  -  er,  Thns  saith  the  Sar -ior.rhildren  o-bey  his  blest  eom-mands. 

Love  each  other,        Love  each  other,        'Tis  his  blest  com-mand. 

 M  *■  m-   M  M~  


I  WAS  LOST.  A  LITTLE  LAMB. 


195 


'He  shall  gather  the  lambs  with  his  arms." — Is.  xl.  ii. 


— I — «-#[ — J- 


1.  I  was  lost,    a      lit-tlelamb,    Out  of  Je 

2.  Now  I'm  safe,  a      lit-tlelamb.  Safe  in  Je 


sus' 
sus* 


fold, 
fold. 


^  y  I  r 


• 

 t^- 

a  W—M 

_(2  #  

 P  

r         r  i- 

r— 1  1  K~-^»-i 

Faint  with  hun-ger  and  with  fear,     In  the  dark  and 
Je-sus  found  and  brought  mc  in,  From  the  dark  and 


cold, 
cold, 


3S 


Je-sus missedme,  tho*  a  lamb.  Lit  tle,  lone  and  weak, 
Is  he  glad,  and    am  not  I —       I,  who  went  a  -  stray, 


And  he  could  not  rest  for  love,  He  the  lost  must  seek. 
Glad  that  he  hast  brought  me  back  To  the  heav'n-ly       way  ? 

^      »^         -9-  J  J 

 p-p=T— r=^^r — n  f — I — 

Coppri^hted,  1879,  by  F.  H  Kbvbl(„ 


196 


NEVER  BE  AFRAID. 


i 


Wm  B.  Bradbury 


-«1  »! 


Je  -  sus, 

Je  -  sus, 

Je  -  sus, 

Je  -  sus, 

Je  -  sus, 


Nev  -  er 
Nev  -  er 
Nev  -  er 
Nev  -  er  be 
Nev  -  er  be 


be 
be 
be 


a  -  fraid 
a  -  fraid 
a  -  fraid 
a  -  fraid 
a  -  fraid 


to 
to 
to 
to 
to 


speak  for 
work  for 


bear 
live 
die 


for 
for 
for 


mi 


I 


I 


IE 


-!?— I- 


Think  how  much  a  word  can  do; 

In  his  vine -yard  day  by  day ; 
Keen  re-proach-es  when  they  fall ; 
If   you  on    his  care  de-pend; 
He,  the  Life,  the  Truth, the  Way; 


Nev-er  be   a  •  fraid  to 
La-borwitha    kind  and 
Pa-tient-ly  en -dure  your 
Safe  -  ly  shallyou  pass  thro* 
Gen-tly  in  his  arms  of 


3S 


i 


own  your  Sav 
will  -  ing  spir 
ev  -  *ry  tri 
ev  r  'ry  tri 
love   will  bear 


 ^  

ior,  He  who  loves  and  cares  for  you. 

'  it.  He   will    all   your   toil  re-pay. 

•  al,  Je  -  sus  meek  -  ly     bore  them  all. 

•  al,  He  will  bring  you  to  the  end. 
you,  To   the  realms    of     end  -  less  day. 


Chorus. 


Nev  -  er  be 


a  -  fraid, 


Nev  -  er 


be 


a  • 


fraid. 


Copyrighted,  1864,  in  "Ooldea  C«»€r."  Used  by  per.  Biglow  &  Main. 


NEVER  BE  AERAID-Conctuded.  197 


loving  Sav  •  ior.  There- fore  nev  -  er      be      a  -  fraid. 

S    ?    P    V     If   .p         V     y  P 
HAPPY  LITTLE  CHILDREN. 

Mrs.  V.  T.  Kent.  V.  J.  K.  by  per. 

1.  Hap-py    lit  -  tie    chil  -  dren,      All  the  time  are  we, 

2.  Hap  -  py    lit  -  tie   chil  -  dren.     May  we    al  -  ways  be, 

3.  Hap-py   lit  -  tie    chil  -  dren,  When  we  come  to  die. 


qr^-s — ^ —  i> —  IT    ^ — g—  ^— F4-^^^i^ 


J     ^  p 

1^  -        's^  . 

-0  1  _  :i_ 

4.  i  ^ 

1 

Ev  -  *ry  one  can  tru  -  ly      say,       Je  -  sus  cares  for  me. 
Say  -  rng  from  our  lU  -  tie    hearts,  **Je  -  sus,  we  loveThee.*' 
We  shall  have  a  home  a -bove.With  Je  -  sus  in    the  sky. 


I— — f— g^^=5=^  \^   U— g— g-b*!---^] 
1/  p  p  "  •  •  r 


IF  1  COME  TO  JESUS. 


W.  H.  DoANE,  by  per. 
-f^  ^       I   ' 


1.  IF     I  come  to 

2.  If     I  come  to 

3.  If     I  come  to 

4.  Taere  with  hap-py 


-mil 


Je  -  sus, 
Je  - sus, 
Je  -  <;us, 
chil-dren, 


He  will  make  me 
He  will  hear  my 
He  will  take  my 
Robed  in  snow-y 

P  P  ^  Si- 


glad; 
prayer; 
hand, 
white. 


-# — 0 — 0- 


He  will  give  me  pleasure, 

He  will  love  me  dear  -  ly — 

He  will  kind-ly  lead  me 
I  shall  see   my  Sav-ior, 


When  my  heart  i$  sad. 

He    my  sins  did  bear. 

To     a    bet  -  ter  land. 

In    the  world  so  bright. 

^  ,^ 


41 


Chorus. 


^  ^ — ^ — ^^ — ^_H  1  

2(r  H — H — #  1  J  1  

If     I  come  to     Je  -  sus,  ] 

✓ 

^ap-py     I      shall  be, 

 — 'y  \0i  1  1  

-y  y  y  p  

He    is  gent-ly    call  -  ing 


.X 


lit  -  tie  ones  like  me. 

^  ^ 


THESE  TWO  LITTLE  EYES. 


199 


Mrs.  V  J.  Kknt.  by  per. 


These  two  lit  -  tie    eyes'^     that  God  has 

And    he      will  show  us     the   way  to 

These  two  lit  -  tie  hands^,  must  be  ready  to 

This  one    lit  -  tie       heart must  seek  his 


giv-en,  Must 
heav-en,  And 
la  -  bor  For 

fa  -  vor,  These 


]2& 


D.  C.  These  two  lit  -  tie  ears^  must  on  •  ly  list  -  en  To 
D.  C.     To  each  lit 'tie     head  ^    will   then       be    giv-en  A 

FiNB. 


Be 


al    -    ways  look^  to  him, 
teach  us  jto  walk  there -in , 
-Je         sus.all    my     days;  )Tha\twh.nhe 

^  >  ) 

7 


lips®  must  speak  his  praise, 


I^These  two  little feet^  must  be 
calls  us 


P.  .       f^f — #  1  f—rm'^m    ;r^~Tf      P  P  ^     f  f 


that  which  is  pure,  and  goodf. 
crown,    of   glo  -  ^y  bright. 


will-ing    and  hast-cn,  To  walk*  in  the  nar  -  row  road; 
home      to    heav-en,  The  beau  -  i-ful  city  of  light,  » 


X .  Let  children  touch  their  eyes  a  moment.  ^th;liie  fore  fingers  of  both  hsLnds, 

2.  Look,up,  all  together,  a  moment. 

3.  Stoop  a  little,  and  look  at  the  feet. 

4*  Tap  the  floor  lightly  with  one  foot,  marking  time  through  the  line. 
5.  Touch  the  ears. 

o.  Ha^s — not  arms — extended,  palms  upward. 

7.  Right  hand  over  heart. 

8.  Right  fore  finger  on  lower  lip. 

9.  Describe  an  easy  circle  over  the  head,  withVigh^  fore  finger. 

Copyright,  1884.  by  Lucy  J,  Ridsr. 


200         LITTLE  TRAVELERS  ZION-WARD. 

Jambs  Edmeston.  Old  Melody. 

1.  Lit-tle  trav'-lers,  Zi -on-ward, Each  one  ent-*ringin-to  rest, 

2.  Who  are  they, whose  lit-tle  feet,  Pac-ing  life'sdark  jour-ney  thro*, 


3.  Alltheii 

'  earth-ly  jour-ne> 

 #  0  ^  1 

-0-*  0  0  

^past,  Ev-'ry 
p«)  

tear  and  pain 

r      r  - 

goi 

leby, 

-» — 3 

— u  u  • 

LI  p-u-  u 

I* 

J  I 

; 

In  the  king  -  dom  of  your  Lord,  In  the  man-sions  of  the  blest; 
Now  have  reach'd  that  heav'nly  seat, They  had  ev  -  erkeptin  view? 
Here  to- geth  -  er  met  at  last.     At  the  per  -  tal  of  the  sky. 


n  IT 
-©  0  0  

-1 — tH=^ 

r0-- — 

^— 

L|  

i 

U-i- 

Thereto  wel-come  Je-sus  waits, Gives  the  crowns  his  fol-' wers  win, 
from  Green-land's  fro-zen land from  In-dia'ssul-try  plain;'* 
Each  the  wel-come ' '  Come'*  a-waits, Conquerors  o'er  death  and  sin. 


Liftyourheads,yegold-engates,Letthe  lit-tle  trav-'lers  in. 

from  Af-ric'sbar-rensand;"  *'I,from  is-lands  of  the  main." 
Liftyour  heads  ye  gold-en  gates, Let  the  lit-tle  trav-'lers  in. 


r©  • — • — r 



r-^-f-r-gn 

SINGING  AS  WE  JOURNEY. 


201 


z^z 


t=zzii 


1.  We  are  chil-dren  of   a  King,  Heavenly  King,  Heavenly  King, 

2.  We  are  traveling  to  our  home,  Bless-ed  home,  Bless-ed  home, 

3.  Full  of  joy  we  on-wardgo,  Heavenward  go.  Home-ward  go, 


# — — 


3: 


We  are  chil-dren  of  a  King,  Sing  -  ing  as  we  j  our-ney. 
We  are  traveling  to  our  home,  Sing  -  ing  as  we  jour-ney, 
Full  of  joy  we    on-ward  go,     Sing  -  ing  as     we  jour-ney. 


Je-susChrist,our  Guardand  Guide, Bids  us, noth-ing  ter- ri  -  fied, 
Toward  a  cit  -  y     out  of  sight.  Where  will  fall  no  shade  of  night, 
Sing-ing  all  the  jour-neythro' — Singing  hearts  are  brave  and  true — 


:t=t 


^  y  u  u 

y —  ^ 

^  ^  TV, 

-^=t=i!  r— 

 F  H  » 

Fol-low  close-ly 
For  our  Sav-ior 
Sing-ing  till  our  h( 

at   his  side,  1 
is    its    light,  i 
jme  we  view,  S 
-A.  A 

Sing-ing  as  we 
Sing-ing  as  we 
iing-ing  as  we  J 

f  -  " 

our-ney. 
our-ney. 
our-ney. 

r  1 

•-y —  

-t;  ■  a  P 

Copyright,  1878,  byJP^  If  Kmu.. 


202 


FOLLOW  ME. 


Ma.ry  B.  Slkight. 


H.  R.  Palmer  ,  by  pef. 


1.  Hark  !  the  voice  of  Je  -  suscall-ing, "Follow  me,  fol-lowme/* 

2.  Who  will  hear  the  ho  -  ly  mandate*'Follow  me,  foMowme,'* 

3.  Hark  •  en.  lest  He  pleadnoloiig-er,**Follow me,  fol-lowme,'* 


P— ^— P- 


i 


•J  m  Ji  2i  5- 

Soft  -  lythroogb the  si-lence  fall- ing«* Follow,  fol-low  me.*' 

Leav-ing allthingat  his  bid-ding^* 'Follow,  fol-low  me.* 

Once  a-gain.  O  hear  him  call- ing,'*Foll(5w.  fol-low  me.' 


It 


As    ofoldHecalled  the fish-ers, When  Hewalkedby  Ga-li  -  lee, 
Hark  that  tender  voice  entreating,M  a- ri-ners  on  life's  rough  sea, 
Turn-ingswift  at  thy  sweet  8umnionB,Ev-er  more  dearChrist,  would  we, 
K      N  N  ■  N     N    K    ,N    |N  _  i»  .  )•  ^    (•  ^-0^^  P  . 


1 


»  N — N- 


Still  his  pa  tient  voice  is  plead-ing'^Fol-low,  fol  -  low  me.** 
Gent  -  ly,lov-ing-ly  re  ■  peat-ing,"Fol  low,  fol  -  low  me.** 
For  thy  love,  all  else  for  sa-king**Fol-low.fol  •  low  Thee.*' 

-P — P- 


i 


English. 


LITTLE  ONES  LIKE  ME.  203 

Jos.  R.  SWENBV. 


mm 


Sr   


 \-  •  ^-T-«-»- 


I  Je-sus,whenHeleftthe  sky,  And  forsin-nerscame  to  die, 

2.  Mothers  then  the  Savior  sought, In  the  places  where  He  taught, 

3.  Did  the  Sav-ior  say  them',Nay  ?No,  He  kind-ly  badethem  stay, 

4.  *  Twas  for  them  hislife  He  gave,To  redeem  them  from  thegrave. 


HS 

vf    \  "f —  1 

U-     u  If 

i-l  1 

=1  5 

In  his  mer  -  cy  passed  not 
And  to  Him,  Jhe  chil-dren, 
Suf-fer'd  none  to  turn    a  - 
Je  -  sus  now  will  glad  -  ly 


by   Lit- tie  ones  like  me. 

brought.  Lit  -  tie  ones  like  me, 
way,  Lit-tleones  like  me. 
save.      Lit -tie  ones  like  me. 


^  P  I  i 


Chorus. 


Lit-tle  ones,     lit-tle  ones 


Suf-fer  them  to  come,  said  He, 


CI" 


P    ^1  I 


4:  J 

s>  1 

iEi 

I  J 

m 


I 

Je  -  sus  loves  the  lit-tle     ones,      Lit-tle  ones  like  me. 

*  ^  -  -  -  -  ^"^.i 


It: 


1^ 


i 


From  The  Quiver,  by  per.  of  John  J.  Hood. 


204 


Fabbr. 


m 


DEAR  SAVIOR  EVER  AT  MY  SIDE. 


I 


I 


1.  Dear  Sav-ior  ev  -  er  atmyside,Howlov-ingthoumustbe, 

2.  I  cannotfeelTheetouchmyhand Withpre88are,lightandmild, 


i  —  ^  J   J,.  — w_.w,--2>^  » 

3.  And  when,dear Savior,  I  kneel  down,  Morning  andnightfor  prayer. 
fS.  ^  ^  ^  ^ 


-# — o- 


3-2- 


'11 


I'  'I 

To  leave  thy  home  ia  heav'n  toguide,Alit-tle  child  likeme. 
To  check  me, as  my  moth-er  does  Her  lit- tie  way-ward  child, 
Some-thing  there  is  with  -  in  my  heart  That  tells  me  Thou  art  there, 


0. 


-i  '  ^  4IL  4L    4^    0L  \\ 


53i 


   w — 

y  » 

Thy  beau-ti-ful  and shin-ing face,  I  see  not  tho' so  near. 
But  lean  feel  Theein  my  thooght8,Fight-ing  with  sin  forme, 
YeSjWhen  Ipray,Thoupraycst,too;  Thypray'ris  all  for  me, 


V  U  I 


I 


I 


The  sweet-ness  of  thy  still  small  voice  I  am  too  deaf  to  hear. 
And  when  my  Heart  loves  God, I  know  Thegweetness  is  from  Thee 
But  when  I  sleep,Tliou  sleepest  not  But  watchestlov-ing-ly. 


THE  ROYAL  PROCLAMATION. 


205 

Old  Melody. 
-N  \- 


•f  #  0  # — J 


1.  Hear  the  roy  -  aj 
Pub  -  lish-ing  to 

2.  See     the  roy  -  al 
**  Re  -  bel  sin-ners, 

3.  Here    is  wine  and 
Mer  -  cy  flow-ing 

4.  Shout  ye  saints, makejoy  -  ful  men 
An  -  gels,shoutthe  pleas- ing  sto 


pro  -  cla  -  ma  -  tion  The  glad    ti- dings 
ev  -  'ry  crea-ture     To    the    ru  -  ined 
ban  -  ner    fly  -  ing,  Hear  the    her  -  aids 
roy  -  al     fa  -  vor,   Now    is      of  -  fer'd 
milk  and   hon  -  ey,  Come  and  pur-chase 
from    a    foun  -  tain  Stream-ing  from  the 
•  tion, Christ  has  pur-chased 
ry    Thro'  the  bright-er 


Chorus. 


-t^ — — — - — --^-^ — 0 — 0- 


of  sal  -  va  -  tion, 
sons  of  na-tnre 


i — 0 — It- 


H5>  -J 


»|  Je-susreigns,Je-sus  reigns,  Je-sus  reigns. 
^""bMheS^^^  Je-susreigns,Je-sus reigns, Je-sus  reigns. 

with-outmon-ey,  j  Je -sus  reigns,  Te  -  sus  reigns,  Je-sus  reigns, 
ho  -  lymoun-tain,  j  ^  ^ 

rcdmsof 'gTry!  [  J-^ —ignsje -sus  reigns  Je-sus  reigns. 


^:    f   #   0   ^  - 

 m  

-0  

1 — 1  1 

-y  y  f 

 ^  K;  1  r  S;  ^  1  N  ^  ■ 

^  ^  -0-  -0-  J 

Je  •  sus  reigns.  He  reigns  vie  -  to  -  rious   O  -  ver  heav'n  and 

XT     ^  ^  J    ^    I  • 

earth  most  glorious,Je-susreigns,Je- sus  reigns,  Je  -  sus  reigns! 

^=F^^  N~  i — M  1 — ^--^g — n 


206  JESUS  BIDS  US  SHINE. 

E.  O.  ExcBLL.  by  per. 


fl- 


ms-^—z^ — ^— N— N-1 — J  0 

1 .  Je-sus  bids  us  shine,  With  a 

2.  Je-sus  bids  us  shine, First  of 

3.  Je-sus  bids  us  shine, Then  f< 

N  N  ^  N  1      N  ^ 

— 
-if  ^ 

clearpure  light, 
all   for  Him;  V 
3rall  a -round, 

>  r  ^ — 

--.^ 

 K — — 1  —  0  

-5  P — P — P — 1  «  

u  u  u  » 

Jke  a  lit -tie  can-die 
^ell  he  sees  and  knows  it, 
Ma-ny  kinds  of  dark-ness, 

4^— f— — 

-# — 9 — # — 0 — #  0  

"-l^i-U-U-p^  1  ' 

^     -0-  -0-  ^  -5- 

Burn-ing  in    the  night,  In  this  world  of    dark  -  ness. 

If    our  light  is  dim  ;  He  looks  down  from  hea  -  ven. 

In  this  world  a-bound.  Sin  and  want  and     sor  -  row; 

^  h  ^  ^  I  ^   h   ^   h  1  1 


=1  n 

 0  0 

 0  0  S 

 4  0.  4  0  0  ^ 

^       -   -   -  . 

W  e  must  shine,  You  inyour small  cor-ner,And  I  in  mine. 

To  see  us  shine^  You  in  your  small  cor-ner,And  I  in  mine. 

So  we  must  shine, You  in  your  small  cor-ner,  And  I  in  mine. 

  I     h  h  h  ^  ^  1 


— 0—0 — 0 — 0  -\  ■ 


— (S>~ 


i 


"THE  LORD  BLESS  THEE."-Sentence  for  closing. 


1 


1 


The  Lord  bless  thee.and  keep  thee,The  Lord  make  his  face  shine  up-on  thee. 


THE  LORD  BLESS  THEE-Concluded-  207 


 •! 

— 1^  n  N  pH — — , 

 m—^-^rzi  ^-^  1 

^      y          TT  -r  TT 

And  be  gra-cious  un  -  to 

1  ^  1  K 

thee !  Th< 

:  Lord  lift  up  his  coun-te-nance. 

i-l — — tr-^l — t-t — ' 

Copyright,  1884,  by  Lucy  J.  Rider. 


PRAYER  FOR  CLOSING. 


The  grace  of  our  Lord  Je-sus  ( 

— ^  1  1  ,  1  1  1  1  

^^—4— #  h0  0  0  0  #  »  

-"^  M-Tl?^d  k-l  i?^rV-- 

Christ, And  the  love,  and  the  love  of 
L\ — i  0 — ^    ,  1  «  , 

=5  

God,Andtheco 

mmunionoftheho-ly  G 
_^L_^ — # — # — ^  

lost.  Be 

with  us 

1 

all. 

1        V  > 

